Yamaha HTR-N5060 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: HTR-N5060

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

HTR-N5060

Printed in Malaysia WG73970

HTR-N5060

AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ

QUAD 60157

QUASAR 60029

RADIOLA 60157

RADIOTONE 60625

RCA 60032, 60179

REALISTIC 60179

RESTEK 60157

REVOX 60157

ROTEL 60157, 60897

SAE 60157

SAMSUNG 60524

SANSUI 60157, 60625

SANYO 60179

SEG 60625

SHARP 60034

SHERWOOD 60426

SIEMENS 60157, 60362

SIMAUDIO 60157

SONIC FRONTIERS

60157

SONY 60000

STS 60018

SUPERTECH 60625

SYNERGY 60625

TAG MCLAREN

60157

TANDY 60032

TEAC 60362, 60393,

60625, 60643

TECHNICS 60029, 60207,

60303

TECHWOOD 60362

THORENS 60157

THULE AUDIO60157

TOSHIBA 60299, 60481

TRAXDATA 60626

UNIVERSUM 60157, 60362,

60524

WARDS 60000, 60032,

60157, 60179

YAMAHA 60036, 61907

YBA 60625

CD RECORDER

DENON 70626, 70766

HHB 70192

JVC 71294

KENWOOD 70626

LG 71208

MARANTZ 70626

NAD 71208

PHILIPS 70626

PIONEER 70192, 71087

RCA 70420

SONY 70000

TDK 71208

TEAC 70420

VICTOR 70072, 71294

YAMAHA 70888, 71292

MD RECORDER

DENON 70873

KENWOOD 70681

OPTIMUS 71063

PIONEER 71063

SHARP 70861, 71684

SONY 70490

TECHNICS 71078

YAMAHA 70490, 70888,

71909

TAPE DECK

AIWA 70029, 70197

AKAI 70189, 70283

ARCAM 70076

CARVER 70029

DENON 70076

EROICA 70189

GARRARD 70308, 70309

GRUNDIG 70029

HARMAN/KARDON

70029

INKEL 70070

JVC 70244, 70273

KENWOOD 70070, 70205

MAGNAVOX 70029

MARANTZ 70029

MITSUBISHI 70189, 70283

MYRYAD 70029

ONKYO 70135, 70282

OPTIMUS 70027, 70220

ORION 70308, 70309

PANASONIC 70229

PHILIPS 70029, 70229

PIONEER 70027, 70220

POLK AUDIO 70029

RADIOLA 70029

RCA 70027, 70220

REVOX 70029

SANSUI 70029

SHARP 70205, 70231

SONY 70170, 70243

TEAC 70283, 70289,

70308, 70309

TECHNICS 70229

THORENS 70029

VICTOR 70244, 70273

WARDS 70027, 70029

YAMAHA 70097, 70205,

70524

TUNER

ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS

81467

AIWA 80158, 80189

AKAI 80115, 80609

ANAM 80281, 80609

ARCAM 80189

CAIRN 80189

CAMBRIDGE 80189

CAMBRIDGE AUDIO

81455, 81647

CARVER 80189

DENON 80004, 80273

DUAL 80004

GARRARD 80281

GOLDMUND 80189

GOLDSTAR 80281

GOODMANS 80609

GRADIENTE 80281

GRUNDIG 80189, 80281

HARMAN/KARDON

80110, 80189

INKEL 80027, 80066

JBL 80110

JVC 80074

KENWOOD 80027, 80645

LG 80281

LINN 80189

LOEWE 80189

MAGNAVOX 80189

MARANTZ 80189

MEMOREX 80014

MICROMEGA 80189

MUSICAL FIDELITY

80445

MYRYAD 80189

NAD 80320, 80609

NIKKO 80609

ONKYO 80103, 80119

PANASONIC 80309, 80518

PHILIPS 80189

PIONEER 80014

POLK AUDIO 80189

RADIOLA 80189

RESTEK 80189

REVOX 80140, 80189

SANSUI 80189, 80609

SHERWOOD 80066

SIEMENS 80609

SONIC 80281

SONY 80158

SOUNDWAVE 80609

TEAC 80110, 80609

TECHNICS 80309, 80518,

81135

TECHWOOD 80281, 80609

THORENS 80189

UNIVERSUM 80189, 80281,

80609

VICTOR 80074

WARDS 80014, 80158,

80189

YAMAHA 80293, 81908

(TUNER ID1) 81916

(TUNER ID2) 81917

ZENITH 80281

OTHER AUDIO

ACCESSORIES

YAMAHA (iPod) 81981

YAMAHA (NET/USB) 81982

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at

least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20

cm on the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances,

motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment

with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where a foreign object may fall

onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid

dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and

liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or

damage to this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and

may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage

resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than

specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable and

outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit

during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed.

The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Install this unit near the AC wall outlet where the power

cable plug can be reached easily.

17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on

common operating errors before concluding that this unit is

faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this

unit to the standby mode, and then disconnect the power

cable from the AC wall outlet.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power

source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even

if this unit itself is set to the standby mode. In this

state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

1 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

FEATURES.............................................................2

GETTING STARTED............................................ 3

Supplied accessories.................................................. 3

Installing batteries in the remote control................... 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4

Front panel................................................................. 4

Remote control...........................................................6

Front panel display ....................................................9

Rear panel................................................................ 11

CONNECTIONS .................................................. 12

Placing speakers....................................................... 12

Connecting speakers................................................ 13

Information on jacks and cable plugs...................... 16

Audio and video signal flow.................................... 17

Connecting a TV...................................................... 18

Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder,

a VCR or an STB................................................. 19

Connecting a CD player, an MD player

or a tape deck....................................................... 21

Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock ........22

Connecting the network........................................... 23

Connecting a multi-format player, an external

decoder or a sound processor .............................. 24

Connecting a game console, a video camera

or a portable audio player.................................... 24

Connecting the FM and AM antennas..................... 25

Connecting the power cable..................................... 26

Setting the speaker impedance................................. 27

Turning on and off the power.................................. 28

BASIC SETUP......................................................29

PLAYBACK.......................................................... 32

USING AUDIO FEATURES............................... 34

Using SILENT CINEMA........................................ 34

Muting the audio output........................................... 34

Selecting the night listening mode........................... 34

Selecting the input mode ......................................... 35

Using the sleep timer ...............................................35

Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 36

Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode... 37

Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 38

Enjoying multi-channel sources

in 2-channel stereo............................................... 39

Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 39

Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound.............................. 39

USING VIDEO FEATURES............................... 40

Displaying the input source information ................. 40

Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 41

Playing video sources in the background ................41

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND .................... 42

Enjoying multi-channel sources

in 6.1-channel surround....................................... 42

Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround.................. 43

Using Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 44

RECORDING ....................................................... 45

FM/AM TUNING..................................................46

Automatic tuning ..................................................... 46

Manual tuning.......................................................... 47

Automatic preset tuning........................................... 48

Manual preset tuning ............................................... 49

Selecting preset stations........................................... 50

Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 51

RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING

(EUROPE MODEL ONLY).............................53

Selecting the Radio Data System program.............. 53

Using the Radio Data System station network........ 54

Displaying the Radio Data System information...... 55

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS .............................57

Selecting sound field programs ...............................57

Sound field program descriptions............................ 58

Changing sound field parameter settings................. 60

SET MENU............................................................66

Using SET MENU...................................................68

1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 69

2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 74

3 NET/USB MENU................................................. 76

4 OPTION MENU................................................... 78

ADVANCED SETUP............................................81

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................83

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 83

Setting the remote control code............................... 85

Setting library codes................................................ 86

Resetting all remote control codes........................... 87

USING iPod

.........................................................88

Controlling iPod ...................................................... 88

USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES...............90

Navigating the network and USB menus ................ 90

Using a PC server or YAMAHA

MCX-2000........................................................... 92

Using the Internet radio ........................................... 93

Using a USB memory device or a USB

portable audio player........................................... 94

RESETTING THE SYSTEM...............................95

TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................96

GLOSSARY.........................................................103

Audio information ................................................. 103

Video information.................................................. 105

Sound field program information .......................... 105

SPECIFICATIONS.............................................106

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

FEATURES

2 En

Built-in 6-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS output power

(1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω)

Front: 110 W + 110 W

Center: 110 W

Surround: 110 W + 110 W

Surround back: 110 W

Sound field programs

◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound

fields

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6,

DTS 96/24 decoder

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/

Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

™

Sophisticated AM/FM tuner

◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)

Radio Data System

(Europe model only)

◆ Radio Data System tuning capability

iPod controlling capability

◆ DOCK terminal to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock

(such as YDS-10 sold separately), which supports iPod (Click

and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini

Network features

◆ LAN port to connect a PC and YAMAHA MCX-2000 or

access the Internet radio via a LAN

◆ DHCP automatic or manual network configuration

USB features

◆ USB port to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable

audio player

Other features

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize

this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system

◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input

◆ S-video signal input/output capability

◆ Component video input/output capability

(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)

◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔

S-video → component video) capability for monitor out

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Sleep timer

◆ Cinema and music night listening modes

◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes,

backlighting input selector buttons, and an iPod (stationed in a

YAMAHA iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK

terminal) controlling capability

◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound

quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to

that of a high-quality stereo

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

This unit contains programs licensed under the GNU General

Public License and GNU Lesser General Public License.

Windows XP, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect

are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

corporation in the United States and/or countries.

FEATURES

Manu

acture

cense

rom Do

Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories.

Manu

acture

cense

rom D

Theater Systems, Inc. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”,

“NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks

of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright

1996, 2003 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All

right reserved.

iPod

“i

d”

s a tra

emar

omputer,

Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

s rece

ver supports networ

connect

ons.

“S

ILENT

INEM

A”

s a tra

emar

YAMAHA CORPORATION.

GETTING STARTED

3 En

INTRODUCTION

English

Check that you received all of the following parts.

1 Take off the battery compartment cover.

2 Insert the two supplied batteries

(AA, R6, UM-3) according to the polarity

markings (+ and –) on the inside of the

battery compartment.

3 Snap the battery compartment cover back

into place.

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following

conditions:

– the operation range of the remote control decreases.

– the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes

dim.

• Do not use an old battery together with a new one.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2

minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,

the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory

is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control

code that may have been cleared.

GETTING STARTED

Supplied accessories

About this manual

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the

buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control.

In case the button names differ between the front panel and

the remote control, the button name on the remote control is

given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and

specifications are subject to change in part as a result of

improvements, etc. In case of differences between the

manual and product, the product has priority.

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

ON SCREENDAB MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

USB

NET RADIO

PC/MCX

STEREO

EFFECT

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AU X DVR

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

FREQ/TEXT EONSTARTPTY SEEKMODE

Remote control

Batteries (2)

(AA, R6, UM-3)

Indoor FM antenna

(Canada model)

AM loop antenna

Indoor FM antenna

(Europe and Australia

models)

Installing batteries in the remote

control

Notes

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

4 En

1 STANDBY/ON

Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode

(see page 28).

• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote

control.

• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay

before this unit can reproduce sound.

2 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control (see page 8).

3 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this unit

(see page 9).

4 PRESET/TUNING, EDIT

• Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h

between selecting preset station numbers and selecting

the tuning frequency.

• Edits the assignments of preset stations (see page 51).

5 FM/AM

Switches the reception band between FM and AM when

“TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 46).

6 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT

• Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when

“TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 49).

• Selects the speaker channel whose output level you

want to adjust when “TUNER” is not selected as the

input source (see page 36).

7 PRESET/TUNING l / h, LEVEL +/–

• Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8)

when “TUNER” is selected as the input source. The

colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see

page 50).

• Selects the tuning frequency when “TUNER” is

selected as the input source. The colon (:) is not

displayed in the front panel display (see page 46).

• Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using

NEXT when “TUNER” is not selected as the input

source (see page 36).

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO L AUDIO R

USBVIDEO AUX

21347 856

IGFDBACEH

Notes

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

5 En

INTRODUCTION

English

8 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores a preset station in the memory. Hold down this

button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset

tuning (see page 48).

9 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L)

Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator

is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is

turned off) (see page 46).

0 VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.

A PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack

Outputs audio signals for private listening with

headphones (see page 34).

• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the

SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack or the speaker terminals.

• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the

left and right headphone channels.

B SPEAKERS A/B

Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the

FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time

the corresponding button is pressed.

C STRAIGHT (EFFECT)

Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the

“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multi-

channel input signals are output directly from their

respective speakers without effect processing (see

page 39).

D TONE CONTROL

Selects “BASS” or “TREBLE” to adjust the tonal balance

of the front left and right speakers in conjunction with

BASS/TREBLE +/– (see page 33).

E BASS/TREBLE +/–

Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left and right

speakers in conjunction with TONE CONTROL

(see page 33).

F PROGRAM l / h

Selects sound field programs (see page 33).

G INPUT MODE

Selects either digital or analog input signals exclusively or

sets this unit to automatically detect the type of input

signals and select the corresponding input signals when

one component is connected via both digital and analog

connections (see page 35).

H INPUT selector

Selects the desired input source.

I MULTI CH INPUT

Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38).

The input source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks takes

priority over the source selected with the INPUT selector on the

front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control).

J VIDEO AUX jacks

Input audio and video signals from a portable external

source such as a game console, a video camera or a

portable audio player (see page 24).

To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select

“V-AUX” as the input source.

The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel

take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.

K USB port

Use to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable

audio player (see page 94).

Notes

Note

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

6 En

This section describes the function of each control on the

remote control used to control this unit. To operate other

components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on

page 83.

The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded

area below depends on the component selector switch position.

Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. To

control the TUNER functions, set the component selector switch

to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the

input source.

■ Controlling this unit

Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this

unit.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate (see page 8).

2 CODE SET

Use to set up remote control codes (see page 85).

3 Input selector buttons

Select the input source you want to control.

The corresponding input selector button for the currently selected

input source lights up for approximately 5 seconds after you press

any buttons on the remote control, showing which source

component is currently being operated.

4 Sound field program selector buttons

Select sound field programs (see page 57).

– Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in

surround (see page 43).

– Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and

6.1-channel playback of multi-channel sources

(see page 42).

– Use DIRECT ST. to play back 2-channel sources in

hi-fi stereo sound (see page 39).

5 SPEAKERS

Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the

FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel. Press this

button repeatedly to toggle as follows:

6 ENHANCER

Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode

(see page 37).

7 LEVEL

Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the

output level (see page 36).

8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i, ENTER

Select and adjust the sound field program parameters or

the “SET MENU” parameters.

9 RETURN

Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the

“SET MENU” parameters.

Remote control

Note

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

ON SCREENDAB MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

USB

NET RADIO

PC/MCX

STEREO

EFFECT

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AUX DVR

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

FREQ/TEXT EONSTARTPTY SEEKMODE

Note

A on B on

A and B off

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

7 En

INTRODUCTION

English

0 TRANSMIT indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared

signals.

A STANDBY

Sets this unit to the standby mode (see page 28).

B POWER

Turns on this unit (see page 28).

C SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer (see page 35).

D MULTI CH IN

Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks as the input source when using an external

decoder, etc. (see page 38).

E VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

F Component selector switch

Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons

in the shaded area.

AMP

Operates this unit.

SOURCE

Operates the component selected with an input

selector button (see page 84).

Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or

(see page 83).

• To set the remote control codes for other components, see

page 85.

• When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and

(see page 85), priority is given to the one set for DTV/

CBL.

G MUTE

Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio

output to the previous volume level (see page 34).

H STRAIGHT (EFFECT)

Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the

“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multi-

channel input signals are output directly from their

respective speakers without effect processing (see

page 39).

I NIGHT

Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 34).

J SET MENU

Enters “SET MENU” (see page 68).

K DISPLAY

Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video

monitor (see page 41).

L Network and USB input selector buttons

Select the sub input source of NET/USB (see page 90).

PC/MCX

Selects a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000 as the

sub input source of NET/USB.

NET RADIO

Selects the Internet radio as the sub input source of

NET/USB.

USB

Selects a USB memory device or a USB portable

audio player as the sub input source of NET/USB.

• Press NET/USB to select “NET/USB” as the input source

before you press any of the network and USB input selector

buttons stated above to select the corresponding sub input

source of NET/USB.

• When you press any of the network and USB input selector

buttons, the contents previously played for the corresponding

sub input source of NET/USB is automatically played.

M Radio Data System tuning buttons

(Europe model only)

FREQ/TEXT

Switches the Radio Data System display between the

PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the

station offers the corresponding data services) and the

frequency display (see page 55).

PTY SEEK MODE

Sets this unit to the PTY SEEK mode (see page 53).

PTY SEEK START

Starts searching for a station once the desired program

type is selected in the PTY SEEK mode (see page 53).

EON

Selects a program type (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or

SPORT) for automatic tuning (see page 54).

Notes

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

8 En

■ Controlling the TUNER functions

Set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then

press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

4 Numeric buttons

Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations.

7 BAND

Switches the reception band between FM and AM.

8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i

Press j / i to select a preset station group (A to E) and

u / d to select a preset station number (1 to 8)

(see page 50).

The printed letters “DAB MEMORY” and “SRCH MODE” are

not applicable to this unit.

■ Using the remote control

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on this unit during operation.

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types

of conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

Note

Notes

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

l PRESET/TUNING h

VIDEO L AUDIO R

USBVIDEO AUX

30 30

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

ON SCREENDAB MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

USB

NET RADIO

PC/MCX

STEREO

EFFECT

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AUX DVR

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

FREQ/TEXT EONSTARTPTY SEEKMODE

Approximately 6 m

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

9 En

INTRODUCTION

English

1 Decoder indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the

decoders of this unit functions.

2 ENHANCER indicator

Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is

turned on (see page 37).

3 Sound field indicators

Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.

4 VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see

page 44).

5 Input source indicators

The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently

selected input source.

6 DOCK indicator

Lights up when you station your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod

universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately)

connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit

(see page 22).

7 SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound

field program is selected (see page 34).

8 CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field

program (see page 58).

9 AUTO indicator

Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode

(see page 46).

0 TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station

(see page 46).

A STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an

FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.

B MEMORY indicator

Flashes to show that a station can be stored (see page 48).

Front panel display

DVR

DVD

V-AUX

DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

q PL

q EX

q PL

ENHANCER

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA

NIGHT

DOCK

STANDARD

AUTO

PSHOLD RT

EON

PTYPTY

TUNED

MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q PL x

A B

96/24

HiFi DSP

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

DIGITAL

STEREO

EHGIJ KMLOND

13 45 768 B

0A9C

(Europe model only)

Presence DSP sound field

Listening position

Surround left

DSP sound field

Surround right

DSP sound field

Surround back DSP sound field

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

10 En

C VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the current volume level.

D PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code

Modulation) digital audio signals.

E STANDARD indicator

Lights up when the “SUR. STANDARD” or “SUR.

ENHANCED” program is selected.

F SP A B indicators

Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.

G Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

H NIGHT indicator

Lights up when you select a night listening mode

(see page 34).

I HiFi DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field

program (see page 59).

J Multi-information display

Shows the name of the current sound field program and

other information when adjusting or changing settings.

K SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 35).

L MUTE indicator

Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 34).

M 96/24 indicator

Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

N Input channel indicators

Indicate the channel components of the current digital

input signal.

O LFE indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.

P Radio Data System indicators

(Europe model only)

The corresponding indicator lights up to show the type

of the Radio Data System information.

EON

Lights up when the EON data service is being

received.

PTY HOLD

Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System

stations in the PTY SEEK mode.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

11 En

INTRODUCTION

English

1 Video component jacks

See pages 18 and 19 for connection information.

2 Audio component jacks

See page 21 for connection information.

3 MULTI CH INPUT jacks

See page 24 for connection information.

4 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack

See page 13 for connection information.

5 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack

See page 21 for connection information.

6 DIGITAL INPUT jacks

See pages 19 and 21 for connection information.

7 DOCK terminal

Use to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as

YDS-10 sold separately) where your iPod can be

stationed.

See page 22 for connection information.

8 LAN port

Use to connect a network cable for network connections.

See page 23 for connection information.

9 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

See pages 18 and 19 for connection information.

0 Antenna terminals

See page 25 for connection information.

A Speaker terminals

See page 13 for connection information.

B AC OUTLET(S)

Use to supply power to your other audiovisual

components.

See page 26 for details.

Rear panel

AUDIO AUDIO OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT

DVD DVD

COAXIAL

DTV/CBLMD/CD-RMD/CD-R

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

FRONT

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

MD/

CD-R

DVD

FM ANT

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

TUNER SPEAKERS

DOCK

DTV/CBL

IN OUT

DVR DVD DTV/CBL

IN OUT

DVR

CENTER

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

MULTI CH INPUT

VIDEO S VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

FRONT

SURROUND

CENTER

SURROUND BACK

OPTICAL OPTICAL

MONITOR OUT

DTV/

CBL

DVD

DVR

COMPONENT VIDEO

RPBY

LAN

RPBY

8 9

654321

CONNECTIONS

12 En

The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R

speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and

multi-channel audio sources.

ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU

(International Telecommunication Union).

Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus

effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance

from the ideal listening position. The distance of each

speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the

same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds

(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical

to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,

however, are obtained with the full system. Place the

center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as

close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or

under it.

Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround

sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening

position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above

the floor.

Surround back speaker (SB)

The surround back speaker supplements the surround

speakers and provides more realistic front-to-back

transitions. Place this speaker directly behind the listening

position and at the same height as the surround speakers.

Subwoofer (SW)

The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as

the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer

System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass

frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high

fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect)

channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The

position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low

bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to

place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it

slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall

reflections.

CONNECTIONS

Placing speakers

60˚

30˚

80˚

1.8 m (6 ft)

13 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

English

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,

no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be

unnatural and lack bass.

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 28).

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this

unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers.

• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the

monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor.

• If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see

page 27). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 82).

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe,

groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable

to the “–” (black) terminals.

Connecting speakers

Note

CAUTION

OUTPUT

SUB

WOOFER

SPEAKERS

FRONT

SURROUND

CENTER SURROUND BACK

1 2 4 57

Subwoofer

Center

speaker

Front speakers (A)

Surround back

speaker

LeftRight

Surround speakers

Front

speakers

(B)

14 En

CONNECTIONS

FRONT terminals

Connect one or two sets of front speakers (1, 2) to these

terminals. If you use only one front speaker system,

connect it to the FRONT A or B terminal.

CENTER terminals

Connect a center speaker (3) to these terminals.

SURROUND terminals

Connect surround speakers (4, 5) to these terminals.

SURROUND BACK terminals

Connect a surround back speaker (6) to these terminals.

SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack

Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (7) (such as

the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer

System) to this jack.

Speaker layout

15 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

English

■ Connecting the speaker cable

1 Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation

from the end of each speaker cable and then

twist the exposed wires of the cable together

to prevent short circuits.

2 Loosen the knob.

3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side

of each terminal.

4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

■ Connecting the banana plug

(except Europe model)

The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector

widely used to terminate speaker cables.

1 Tighten the knob.

2 Insert the banana plug connector into the

end of the corresponding terminal.

10 mm

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

16 En

CONNECTIONS

■ Audio jacks

This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other

components.

AUDIO jacks

For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left

and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the

right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.

DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital

audio cables.

DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital

audio cables.

• You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the

COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals

input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are

compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.

• Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the

fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not

using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This

cap protects the jack from dust.

■ Video jacks

This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of input jacks on your video

monitor.

VIDEO jacks

For conventional composite video signals transmitted via

composite video cables.

S VIDEO jacks

For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and

chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate

wires of S-video cables.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component video signals, separated into the

luminance (Y) and chrominance (P

B, PR) video signals

transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.

When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 78), the video

signals input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks are converted and

output at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks interchangeably.

Information on jacks and cable plugs

VIDEO S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y P

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO

AUDIO

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO

Left and right

analog audio

cable plugs

Optical

digital

audio cable

plug

Coaxial

digital audio

cable plug

Composite

video cable

plug

S-video

cable plug

Component

video cable

plugs

Audio jacks and cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs

(Red)(White) (Orange) (Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)

Notes

17 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

English

■ Audio signal flow for AUDIO OUT (REC)

This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus, audio signals input at the analog jacks are output only at the analog

AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise, audio signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are output only at the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.

■ Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT

If video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks simultaneously when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to

“ON”, the priority order of the input signals is as follows:

COMPONENT VIDEO > S VIDEO > VIDEO

Audio and video signal flow

Note

DIGITAL AUDIO

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO

COAXIAL

AUDIO

RLRL

Digital output

Output

AUDIO OUT (REC)

Input

Analog output

Digital audio

Analog audio

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Y P

Through

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Input

Video conversion when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 78)

Analog video

18 En

CONNECTIONS

Connect your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the COMPONENT

VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit.

Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between

components are complete.

Connecting a TV

CAUTION

VIDEO S VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

PRPBY

PRPB

S-video in

Component video in

Video in

19 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

English

Connect your DVD player, DVD recorder, VCR or STB (set-top box) using the same type of video connections as those

made for your TV (see page 18). The cable TV receiver and the satellite receiver are examples of the STB.

Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between

components are complete.

• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 78), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV

(see page 18). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other

components to the VIDEO jacks.

• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 78), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When

recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component.

• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL

OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT”

(see page 74).

• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is

given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.

■ Connecting a DVD player

Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB

Notes

CAUTION

AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT

DVD DVD

COAXIAL

DVD DVD

VIDEO S VIDEO

OPTICAL

DVD

COMPONENT VIDEO

RPBY

DVD player

Optical audio out

Coaxial audio out

Video out

Audio out

S-video out

Component video out

20 En

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting a DVD recorder or a VCR

■ Connecting an STB

AUDIO

IN OUT

DVR

IN OUT

DVR

VIDEO S VIDEO

DVR

COMPONENT VIDEO

PRPBY

LR LR

PRPBY

DVD recorder or

VCR

Audio in

Audio out

Video in

Video out

Component video out

S-video in

S-video out

AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT

DTV/CBL

DTV/CBL DTV/CBL

VIDEO S VIDEO

OPTICAL

DTV/

CBL

COMPONENT VIDEO

RPBY

Cable TV receiver or

satellite receiver

Optical audio out

Component video out

Video out

Audio out

S-video out

21 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

English

Connect your CD player, MD player or tape deck via analog and/or digital connections.

Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between

components are complete.

To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL

OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT”

(see page 74).

Connecting a CD player, an MD player or a tape deck

Note

CAUTION

AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT

MD/CD-RMD/CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

MD/

CD-R

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL OPTICAL

LR LR

CD player

MD recorder or

tape deck

Audio out

Audio in

Optical audio out

Optical audio in

22 En

CONNECTIONS

This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal

dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the

supplied remote control. Connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) to the DOCK

terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. Once the connection is complete, station your iPod in the

YAMAHA iPod universal dock.

Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between

components are complete.

• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.

• You need a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) and its dedicated cable compatible with the DOCK

terminal of this unit.

• Do not connect any iPod accessories (such as headphones, a wired remote control, or an FM transmitter) to your iPod when it is

stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately).

• Once your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of

this unit, this unit begins the signal transmission with your iPod.

• Unless your iPod is firmly stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK

terminal of this unit, audio and/or video signals may not be output properly.

• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK

indicator lights up in the front panel display. If the connection between your iPod and this unit fails, a status message appears in the

front panel display. For a complete list of connection status messages, see the iPod section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 100.

• Only analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the

analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.

• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold

separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on.

• Depending on the type of iPod, you may need to insert one of the iPod adapters supplied with a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such

as YDS-10 sold separately) into the dock slot before you station your iPod.

Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock

Notes

CAUTION

DOCK

YAMAHA iPod universal dock

(such as YDS-10 sold separately)

iPod

23 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

English

To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the LAN port

of this unit, and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the DHCP (Dynamic Host

Configuration Protocol) server function. The following diagram shows a connection example where this unit is connected

to one of the LAN ports on a 4-port router. To enjoy music files saved on your PC and YAMAHA MCX-2000 or access

the Internet radio, each device must be connected properly in the network.

If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings manually (see page 76).

Connecting the network

Note

LAN

WAN

Router

Modem

YAMAHA MCX-2000

Internet

YAMAHA MCX-C15

YAMAHA MCX-A10

(with optional

speakers)

Network cable

24 En

CONNECTIONS

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks

(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a

multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor.

Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player,

external decoder or sound processor to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right output

jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and

surround channels.

Do not connect this unit or other components to

the AC power supply until all connections

between components are complete.

• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38), this unit

automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and

you cannot select sound field programs.

• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We

recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker

system before using this feature.

• When headphones are used, only the signals input at the

FRONT L/R jacks are output at the PHONES jack.

Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a

game console, a video camera or a portable audio player to

this unit.

Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and

other components before making connections.

The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal takes priority over

the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.

Connecting a multi-format player,

an external decoder or a sound

processor

Notes

CAUTION

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

FRONT

CENTER

MULTI CH INPUT

L R L R

Multi-format player,

external decoder or

sound processor

Front out

Surround out

Subwoofer out

Center out

Connecting a game console, a

video camera or a portable audio

player

Note

CAUTION

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

l PRESET/TUNING h

VIDEO L AUDIO R

USBVIDEO AUX

VIDEO L AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

Game console,

video camera or

portable audio player

Audio out

Video out

25 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

English

Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this

unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient

signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the

designated terminals.

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,

install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized

YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Set up the AM loop antenna.

2 Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT

terminal.

3 Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires

into the AM ANT terminal.

4 Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal back

into place.

5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the

other lead wire to the GND terminal.

Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to this

unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception when you

tune into AM stations.

Connecting the FM and AM antennas

Notes

FM ANT

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

TUNER

AM loop antenna

(supplied)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and

minimum interference,

connect the antenna GND

terminal to a good earth

ground. A good earth ground

is a metal stake driven into

moist earth.

Indoor FM antenna

(supplied)

Outdoor AM antenna

Use a 5 to 10 m of vinyl-covered wire

extended from a window.

26 En

CONNECTIONS

Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet.

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

Australia model ..................................................... 1 outlet

Other models .........................................................2 outlets

Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected

components. Connect the power cable of your other

components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is

supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to

these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is set to the standby

mode. For information on the maximum power or the total

power consumption of the components that can be

connected to these outlet(s), see “SPECIFICATIONS” on

page 106.

Connecting the power cable

AC OUTLETS

To the AC wall outlet

(Canada model)

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, the stored data will be lost in case the power

cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the

power supply is cut off for more than one week.

27 En

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

English

If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to

“6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4

ohm speakers can be also used as the front

speakers.

1 Make sure this unit is set to the standby

mode.

See page 28 for details about turning on this unit or

setting it to the standby mode.

2 Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the

front panel and then press STANDBY/ON to

turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel to

select “SP IMP.”.

The following display appears in the front panel

display.

4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front

panel repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”.

The following display appears in the front panel

display.

5 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to

save the new setting and set this unit to the

standby mode.

The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit.

Setting the speaker impedance

CAUTION

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

BASS/TREBLE

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

PRESET/TUNING

VIDEO L AUDIO R

USBVIDEO AUX

32,4

2,5

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

STANDBY

/ON

While holding

down

Note

l PROGRAM h

SP IMP.-8 MIN

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

SP IMP.-6 MIN

STANDBY

/ON

28 En

CONNECTIONS

When all connections are complete, turn on this unit.

■ Turning on this unit

Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or

POWER on the remote control) to turn on this

unit.

■ Setting this unit to the standby mode

Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or

STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit

to the standby mode.

Turning on and off the power

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

BASS/TREBLE

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

PRESET/TUNING

VIDEO L AUDIO R

USBVIDEO AUX

AMP

SOURCE

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AU X D VR

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY

POWER

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

Front panel

Remote control

STANDBY

/ON

STANDBY

Front panel

Remote control

BASIC SETUP

29 En

PREPARATION

English

The “BASIC SETUP” feature is a useful way to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort.

• Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this unit.

• If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU” (see

page 69).

• Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 69).

• Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter.

• Press RETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu level.

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP.

2 Press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

3 Press u / d to select “BASIC SETUP”.

4 Press ENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP”.

The following display appears in the OSD.

5 Press u / d to select “ROOM” and then j / i

to select the desired setting.

Select the size of the room where you have installed

your speakers. In general, the room sizes are defined

as follows:

Choices: S, M, L

[Canada model]

S (small) 16 x 13ft, 200ft

(4.8 x 4.0m, 20m

)

M (medium) 20 x 16ft, 300ft

(6.3 x 5.0m, 30m

)

L (large) 26 x 19ft, 450ft

(7.9 x 5.8m, 45m

)

[Other models]

S (small) 3.6 x 2.8m, 10m

M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0m, 20m

L (large) 6.3 x 5.0m, 30m

BASIC SETUP

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AU X D VR

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

ON SCREENDAB MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDI O

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

3-12

2,13

AMP

SOURCE

SET MENU

SRCH MODE



SET MENU

.;BASICSETUP

;MANUALSETUP

.;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

;BASIC SETUP

.ROOM: S >M L

SUBWOOFER;;;;YES

SPEAKERS;;;;6spk

SETUP:>OK CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

;BASIC SETUP

.ROOM: S >M L

SUBWOOFER;;;;YES

SPEAKERS;;;;6spk

SETUP:>OK CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

30 En

BASIC SETUP

6 Press d to select “SUBWOOFER” and then

j / i to select the desired setting.

Choices: YES, NONE

• Select “YES” if you have a subwoofer in your

system.

• Select “NONE” if you do not have a subwoofer in

your system.

7 Press d to select “SPEAKERS” and then j / i

to select the number of speakers connected

to this unit.

8 Press d to select “SETUP” and then j / i to

select the desired setting.

Choices: OK, CANCEL

• Select “OK” to apply the settings you made.

• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the setup procedure

without making any changes.

You can also press SET MENU to cancel the setup

procedure.

9 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.

If you selected “OK” in step 8, each speaker outputs a

test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:Test Tone” appears

in the OSD for a few seconds and then “CHECK

OK?” appears in the OSD.

Check the speaker connections (see page 13) and adjust the

“SPEAKERS” settings back in step 7, if necessary.

Choice Display Speakers

2spk

Front L/R

3spk

Front L/R, Center

4spk

Front L/R, Surround L/R

5spk

Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R

6spk

Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,

Surround back

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

;BASIC SETUP

ROOM: S >M L

.SUBWOOFER;;;;YES

SPEAKERS;;;;6spk

SETUP:>OK CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

;BASIC SETUP

ROOM: S >M L

SUBWOOFER;;;;YES

.SPEAKERS;;;;6spk

SETUP:>OK CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

LL C R

SL SB SR

LL C R

SL SB SR

LL CR

SL SB SR

LL C R

SL SB SR

LL C R

SL SB

LL C R

SL SB SR

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

;BASIC SETUP

ROOM: S >M L

SUBWOOFER;;;;YES

SPEAKERS;;;;6spk

. SETUP:>OK CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

;BASIC SETUP

ROOM: S >M L

SUBWOOFER;;;;YES

SPEAKERS;;;;6spk

SETUP:>OK CANCEL

.CHECK:Test Tone

[<]/[>]:Select

;BASIC SETUP

ROOM: S >M L

SUBWOOFER;;;;YES

SPEAKERS;;;;6spk

SETUP:>OK CANCEL

.CHECK OK?;;;;YES

[<]/[>]:Select

31 En

BASIC SETUP

PREPARATION

English

10 Press j / i to select the desired setting.

Choices: YES, NO

• Select “YES” to complete the setup procedure if

the test tone levels from each speaker were

satisfactory.

• Select “NO” to proceed to the speaker level

adjustment menu in step 12 to balance the output

level of each speaker.

11 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.

• If you selected “YES” in step 10, the setup

procedure is completed and the display returns to

the top “SET MENU” display.

• If you selected “NO” in step 10, the speaker level

adjustment display appears in the front panel

display.

12 Press u / d to select a speaker and then j / i

to adjust the balance.

The selected speaker and the front left speaker (or the

surround left speaker) output a test tone in turn.

•Press i to increase the value.

•Press j to decrease the value.

• Select “FR” to adjust the balance between the front

left and right speakers.

• Select “C” to adjust the balance between the front

left and center speakers.

• Select “SL” to adjust the balance between the front

left and surround left speakers.

• Select “SB” to adjust the balance between the

surround left and surround back speakers.

• Select “SR” to adjust the balance between the

surround left and surround right speakers.

• Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance between the

front left speaker and the subwoofer.

13 Press SET MENU to exit from “BASIC

SETUP”.

;BASIC SETUP

ROOM: S >M L

SUBWOOFER;;;;YES

SPEAKERS;;;;6spk

SETUP:>OK CANCEL

.CHECK OK?;;;;YES

[<]/[>]:Select

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH



.FR;;;;;;;;;;

 C;;;;;;;;;;

SL;;;;;;;;;;

;BASIC SETUP

-__________+

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

PLAYBACK

32 En

Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD

encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may

damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the

sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel

(or set the component selector switch to

AMP and then press SPEAKERS on the

remote control repeatedly) to turn on the set

of front speakers you want to use.

Each time you press SPEAKERS A or B, the

respective set of front speakers are turned on or off.

3 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or press one of the input selector buttons on

the remote control) to select the desired

input source.

The name of the currently selected input source

appears in the front panel display and in the OSD for

a few seconds.

• To enjoy multi-channel sources in surround, connect the

source component via digital connection and set the input

mode to “AUTO” or “DTS” (see page 35).

• See pages 42 for details about surround sound.

4 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

• Refer to the operating instructions for the source

component.

• See page 46 for details about tuning instructions.

PLAYBACK

CAUTION

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

BASS/TREBLE

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

PRESET/TUNING

VIDEO L AUDIO R

USBVIDEO AUX

766 32

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AU X D VR

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

ON SCREENDAB MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

DISC SKIP

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

SPEAKERS

AMP

SOURCE

Front panel

Remote control

Notes

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AUX DVR

INPUT

Front panel Remote control

DVR

DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

VOLUME

DVD AUTO

Currently selected

input source

Currently selected

input mode

Available input sources

33 En

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

English

5 Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press

VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust

the volume to the desired output level.

6 Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel

repeatedly to select “TREBLE” or “BASS”

and then press BASS/TREBLE +/– repeatedly

to adjust the corresponding frequency

response level.

• Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency

response.

• Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency

response.

• Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored

independently.

• When “TONE BYPASS” is set to “AUTO” (see page 73),

and “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB, audio output

automatically bypasses the tone control circuitry of this

unit.

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-

frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of

the front speakers may not match that of the other

speakers.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective when the “DIRECT

STEREO” mode (see page 39) is selected or when the

component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is

selected as the input source (see page 38).

7 Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel (or

press one of the sound field program

selector buttons on the remote control)

repeatedly to select the desired sound field

program.

The name of the selected sound field program appears

in the front panel display and in the OSD.

See page 58 for details about sound field programs.

• Choose a sound field program based on your listening

preference, not merely on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically

selects the last sound field program used with the

corresponding input source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the

component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is

selected as the input source (see page 38).

• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS

96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound

field programs are applied.

• To display information about the currently selected input

source in the OSD, see page 40 for details.

Notes

VOLUME

Remote control

Front panel

TONE CONTROL

l PROGRAM h

DVR

DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

VOLUME

TREBLE 0dB

Notes

l PROGRAM h

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

Front panel

Remote control

DVR

DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

VOLUME

TV Sports

Currently selected

sound field program

USING AUDIO FEATURES

34 En

SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS

sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA

activates automatically whenever you connect headphones

to the PHONES jack while listening to a source with a

CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field program (see

page 58). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (see page 38).

• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the “DIRECT

STEREO” (see page 39), “2ch Stereo” (see page 39) or

“STRAIGHT” mode (see page 39) is selected.

Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the

audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the

audio output.

• You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or VOLUME

+/– on the remote control to resume the audio output.

• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTING TYPE”

parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 73).

• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the

audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel

display when the audio output is resumed.

If you change the input source or the sound field program with the

remote control while the audio output is being muted, this unit

resumes the audio output.

The night listening modes are designed to improve

listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either

“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on

the type of material you are playing.

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press NIGHT on the remote control

repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or

“NIGHT:MUSIC”.

Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF

• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.

• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music

sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

• Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.

When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the

effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or

“NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front

panel display.

Choices: MIN, MID, MAX

• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.

• Select “MID” for standard compression.

• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.

USING AUDIO FEATURES

Using SILENT CINEMA

Notes

Muting the audio output

Note

MUTE

Selecting the night listening mode

NIGHT

AMP

SOURCE

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Effect.Lvl:MID

35 En

USING AUDIO FEATURES

BASIC

OPERATION

English

“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are

stored independently.

• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following

cases:

– when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode (see page 39) is

selected.

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see

page 38).

– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

• The effectiveness of the night listening modes may vary

depending on the input source and surround sound settings

you use.

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the

following to select the type of input signals you want to

use.

• We recommend setting “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” in most

cases.

• You can adjust the default input mode of this unit by using the

“INPUT MODE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” (see page 75).

• To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio

connection, be sure to set “INPUT MODE” to “DTS”.

• DTS decoding may not be performed correctly depending on

the player even if you make a digital connection between this

unit and the player.

1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

to select the desired input source.

2 Press INPUT MODE on the front panel

repeatedly to select the desired input mode.

AUTO Automatically selects input signals in

the following order:

(1) Digital signals

(2) Analog signals

DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in

DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no

sound is output.

ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no

analog signals are input, no sound is

output.

When “INPUT MODE” is set to “AUTO”, this unit

automatically switches to the appropriate decoder if a Dolby

Digital or DTS signal is detected.

Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to AC OUTLET(S) (see page 26).

1 Press one of the input selector buttons on

the remote control to select the desired input

source.

2 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

• Refer to the operating instructions for the source

component.

• See page 46 for details about tuning instructions.

Notes

Selecting the input mode

Notes

INPUT

INPUT MODE

DVR

DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

VOLUME

DVD AUTO

Currently selected

input source

Currently selected

input mode

Available input sources

Note

Using the sleep timer

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AUX DVR

36 En

USING AUDIO FEATURES

3 Press SLEEP on the remote control

repeatedly to set the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display

changes as shown below.

The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching

the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep

timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front

panel display, and the display returns to the selected

sound field program.

4 To cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP on

the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP

OFF” appears in the front panel display.

The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”

disappears from the front panel display after a few

seconds.

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or STANDBY on the

remote control) to set this unit to the standby mode.

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while

listening to a music source. This is also possible when

playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

This operation will override the level adjustments made in

“BASIC SETUP” (see page 29) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see

page 71).

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press LEVEL on the remote control

repeatedly to select the speaker you want to

adjust.

• Select “FRONT L” to adjust the front left speaker

output level.

• Select “CENTER” to adjust the center speaker

output level.

• Select “FRONT R” to adjust the front right speaker

output level.

• Select “SUR. R” to adjust the surround right

speaker output level.

• Select “SUR. B” to adjust the surround back

speaker output level.

• Select “SUR. L” to adjust the surround left speaker

output level.

• Select “SWFR” to adjust the subwoofer output

level.

Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can also

select the speaker by pressing u / d.

SLEEP

SLEEP 90min

SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF

SLEEP 120min

DVR DVD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

VOLUME

SLEEP

SLEEP 120min

Flashes

DVR DVD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

VOLUME

SLEEP

STRAIGHT

Lights up

SLEEP

DVR DVD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

VOLUME

SLEEP OFF

Adjusting the speaker level

Note

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

ON SCREENDAB MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

DISC SKIP

STEREO

EFFECT

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

AMP

SOURCE

TITLE

LEVEL

BAND

37 En

USING AUDIO FEATURES

BASIC

OPERATION

English

2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the

speaker output level.

• Press i to increase the value.

• Press j to decrease the value.

Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB

This operation can also be performed using the control buttons on

the front panel. Press NEXT on the front panel repeatedly to

select the speaker channel whose output level you want to adjust

and then press LEVEL +/– on the front panel to adjust the output

level.

Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are

created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is

resampled to lower the bitrate and to remove sounds that

are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The

Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances

your listening experience by regenerating the missing

harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened

complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as

well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass

is compensated, providing the improved performance of

the overall sound system.

• The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is compatible with the

PCM signals (48 kHz), the analog 2-channel input sources and

the music data input at the USB port or the LAN port.

• The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with

any of the sound field programs.

• When the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on while

an incompatible input source is being played back, “Not

Available” appears in the front panel display and in the OSD.

• When the input source is changed to an incompatible input

source while the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned

on, the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is automatically

turned off and the incompatible input source is played back in

2-channel or 6-channel stereo.

The ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display

when one of the Compressed Music Enhancer modes is selected.

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Selecting the Compressed Music

Enhancer mode

Notes

38 En

USING AUDIO FEATURES

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press ENHANCER on the remote

control repeatedly to select the desired

Compressed Music Enhancer mode.

The following display appears in the OSD and the

ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel

display.

Choices: 2ch Enhancer, 6ch Enhancer,

Off (previously selected sound field

program)

• Select “2ch Enhancer” to play back compression

artifacts in 2-channel stereo.

• Select “6ch Enhancer” to play back compression

artifacts in 6-channel stereo.

• Select Off (previously selected sound field

program) to turn off the Compressed Music

Enhancer mode.

You can also switch between “2ch Enhancer” and “6ch

Enhancer” by pressing j / i on the remote control when the

arrow is located on the left of “2ch Enhancer” or “6ch

Enhancer” in the OSD.

2 Press d once and then j / i on the remote

control to select the desired effect level.

Choices: HIGH, LOW

• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.

• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.

Set the effect level to “HIGH” or “LOW” according to the

characteristics of a source. The high-frequency signals of

some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set

the effect level to “LOW”.

Use this feature to select the component connected to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 24) as the input

source.

Press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or

MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that

“MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel

display.

When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display,

no other source can be played. To select another input source with

the INPUT selector on the front panel (or one of the input selector

buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the

remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” disappears from the

front panel display.

Note

ENHANCER

MUSIC ENHANCER

. 2ch Enhancer

LOW >HIGH

ENHANCER

AMP

SOURCE

Lights up

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

MUSIC ENHANCER

2ch Enhancer

. LOW >HIGH

Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT

component

Note

MULTI CH

INPUT

MULTI CH IN

Front panel

Remote control

MULTI CH INPUT

39 En

USING AUDIO FEATURES

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels

and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.

Set the component selector switch to AMP and

then press STEREO on the remote control

repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”.

• You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS

OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 70).

• You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by pressing

PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly.

When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel

stereo sources are output from only the front left and right

speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into

the appropriate channels without any additional effect

processing.

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press STRAIGHT on the remote

control to select “STRAIGHT”.

2 To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press

STRAIGHT on the remote control again so

that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front

panel display.

The sound effect is turned back on.

You can also select the “STRAIGHT” mode by pressing

STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel.

The “DIRECT STEREO” mode allows sources to bypass

the decoders and DSP processors of this unit so that you

can enjoy pure hi-fi sound from 2-channel PCM and

analog sources.

Set the component selector switch to AMP and

then press DIRECT ST. on the remote control to

select “DIRECT STEREO”.

• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play CDs encoded in DTS

when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode is selected.

• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input,

this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog

input. When “DTS” is selected as the input mode (see page 35),

no sound will be output.

• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.

• “TONE CONTROL” (see page 33) and “SOUND MENU” (see

page 69) settings (except for speaker level settings) are not

effective.

• The front panel display automatically dims.

You can also select the “DIRECT STEREO” mode by pressing

PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly.

Enjoying multi-channel sources in

2-channel stereo

Enjoying unprocessed input

sources

STEREO

AMP

SOURCE

2ch Stereo

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

ENT.

AMP

SOURCE

STRAIGHT

Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

DIRECT ST.

DIRECT STEREO

USING VIDEO FEATURES

40 En

You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,

bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press SET MENU on the remote

control.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2 Press d repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO”

and then press ENTER.

The following information about the input source

appears in the OSD.

Signal format FORMAT

Signal format display. When this unit cannot detect a

digital signal, it automatically switches to analog

input.

Display status: Analog, Digital, DolbyD, DTS, MP3,

PCM, WMA, ---

“---” appears when this unit cannot detect any signals.

Sampling frequency SAMPLING

The number of samples per second taken from a

continuous signal to make a discrete signal.

Display status: 8kHz, 11kHz, 12kHz, 16kHz,

22.05kHz, 24kHz, 32kHz, 44.1kHz,

48kHz, 64kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz, ---

“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the sampling

frequency.

Channel CHANNEL

The number of source channels in the input signal

(front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel

soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround

channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”.

“---” appears when there is no source channel available.

Bit rate BITRATE

The number of bits passing a given point per second.

“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the bit rate.

Flag FLAG

Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM

signals that cue this unit to automatically switch

decoders.

3 Press SET MENU on the remote control again

to exit from “SET MENU”.

USING VIDEO FEATURES

Displaying the input source

information



SET MENU

.;BASICSETUP

;MANUALSETUP

.;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

AMP

SOURCE

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

;SIGNAL INFO

FORMAT PCM

SAMPLING 48kHz

CHANNEL 2/0/---

BITRATE ---

FLAG NONE

 [RETURN]:Exit



A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Note

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

41 En

USING VIDEO FEATURES

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can display the operating information of this unit on a

video monitor. If you display the “SET MENU” and sound

field program parameter settings on a video monitor, it is

much easier to see the available options and parameters

than it is to read the information in the front panel display.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press DISPLAY on the remote

control repeatedly to toggle between the

OSD modes.

The OSD mode changes in the following order.

Full display

Fully shows the sound field program parameter

settings as well as the contents of the front panel

display.

Short display

Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display

at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this

unit.

Display off

No information is displayed except for the “SET

MENU” screen.

You can display a gray background in the OSD when there is not

video signal being input by setting “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION

MENU” to “AUTO” (see page 79).

• The OSD signal is not output at the DVR OUT jacks and will

not be recorded.

• You must set “VIDEO CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON”

(see page 78) to display the OSD.

• To display the OSD with the component video signals output at

the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, set the

OSD mode to the full display mode.

• When “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “OFF”

(see page 79), the OSD may not be displayed correctly

depending on the conditions of the picture.

You can combine a video image from a video source with

sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy

listening to classical music while viewing beautiful

scenery from the video source on the video monitor.

Press the input selector buttons on the remote

control to select a video source and then an

audio source.

If you want to enjoy an audio source input at the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video

source and then press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or

MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to select the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source

(see page 38).

Selecting the OSD mode

DISPLAY

ON SCREEN

AMP

SOURCE

Full display

Short display

Display off

P02 MUSIC

. Pop/Rock

DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB

P.INIT.DLY;;21ms

P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0

S.INIT.DLY;;25ms

S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0

P02 MUSIC

Pop/Rock

Full display Short display

Notes

Playing video sources in the

background

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

TUNER

V-AUX

DVR

CD CD-R

DVD DTV

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AUX DVR

Audio sources

Video sources

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND

42 En

If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature

to enjoy 6.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources

using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or

DTS-ES decoders.

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press EXTD SUR. on the remote

control repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and

6.1-channel playback.

2 Press j / i repeatedly to select a decoder

while “PLIIxMusic” (etc.) is displayed.

Auto AUTO

When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is

input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back

the signal in 6.1 channels.

If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present

in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1

channels.

Decoders

You can select from the following decoders depending on

the format of the source you are playing.

Off OFF

Decoders are not used to create 6.1 channels.

• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag

that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing

these kinds of discs in 6.1 channels, select a decoder manually

from “PLIIxMusic”, “EX/ES” or “EX”.

• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press EXTD

SUR. in the following cases:

– when “CENTER SP” (see page 70), “SUR. L/R SP” (see

page 70) or “SUR. B SP” (see page 70) is set to “NONE”.

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks is being played.

– when the source being played does not contain surround left

and right channel signals.

– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

– when the “2ch Stereo” (see page 39) or “DIRECT STEREO”

(see page 39) mode is selected.

• When this unit is set to the standby mode, this setting will be

reset to “AUTO”.

• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B SP” is

set to “NONE” (see page 70).

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND

Enjoying multi-channel sources in

6.1-channel surround

EXTD SUR.

AMP

SOURCE

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Decoder Functions

PLIIxMusic

Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals

in 6.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx

music decoder.

EX/ES

Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals

in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital

EX or DTS-ES decoder.

Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals

in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital

EX decoder.

Notes

43 En

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played

back on multi-channels.

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press STANDARD on the remote

control repeatedly to switch between the

“SUR. STANDARD” and “SUR. ENHANCED”

programs or press MOVIE to select the

“MOVIE THEATER” program.

2 Press SELECT on the remote control

repeatedly to select the desired decoder.

You can select from the following modes depending

on the type of source you are playing and your

personal preference.

You can also select a decoder by pressing j / i on the remote

control while the decoder type is displayed in the front panel

display.

The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B SP” is

set to “NONE” (see page 70).

Enjoying 2-channel sources in

surround

AMP

SOURCE

STANDARD

MOVIE

SELECT

SUR. STANDARD Functions

PRO LOGIC

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any

sources

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for

movie sources

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for

music sources

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for

game sources

PLIIx Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for

movie sources

PLIIx Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for

music sources

PLIIx Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for

game sources

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie sources

Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music sources

SUR. ENHANCED

MOVIE THEATER

Functions

PRO LOGIC

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any

sources

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for

movie sources

PLIIx Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for

movie sources

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie sources

Note

44 En

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates

virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.

If you set “SUR. L/R SP”

to “NONE” (see page 70),

Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever

you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see

page 58).

Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R

SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 70) in the following cases:

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38).

– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

– when the “DIRECT STEREO” (see page 39), “2ch Stereo”

(see page 39) or “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 39) is

selected.

Using Virtual CINEMA DSP

Note

RECORDING

45 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating

instructions for those components.

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in

noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the

following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs

(when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating

instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player.

• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.

• The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 33), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 71) and the sound field programs (see

page 58) do not affect the recorded material.

• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing

video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an

S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.

• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,

analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is

connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.

• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright

laws.

• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.

Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

1 Turn on all the connected components.

2 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or press one of the input selector buttons on

the remote control) to select the source

component you want to record from.

3 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

RECORDING

Notes

If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture

itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

CAUTION

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

l PRESET/TUNING h

VIDEO L AUDIO R

USBVIDEO AUX

AMP

SOURCE

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AU X D VR

INPUT

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AUX DVR

Front panel Remote control

FM/AM TUNING

46 En

There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and

there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use

the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of

the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset

stations with each other.

Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”

as the input source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that

the AUTO indicator lights up in the front

panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the

colon (:) off.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin

automatic tuning.

When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED

indicator lights up and the frequency of the received

station is shown in the front panel display.

•Press h to tune into a higher frequency.

•Press l to tune into a lower frequency.

FM/AM TUNING

Note

Automatic tuning

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

BASS/TREBLE

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

PRESET/TUNING

VIDEO L AUDIO R

USBVIDEO AUX

3 31

INPUT

Front panel

FM/AM

AMFM

AUTO/MAN'L

TUNING MODE

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

AUTO TUNED

VOLUME

A AM 1440 kHz

Lights upNo colon (:)

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

AUTO TUNED

VOLUME

A AM 1530 kHz

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

Lights up

47 En

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

English

If the signal received from the station you want to select is

weak, tune into it manually.

Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the

tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.

1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”

as the input source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that

the AUTO indicator disappears from the front

panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the

colon (:) off.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into

the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to continue searching.

Manual tuning

Note

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

BASS/TREBLE

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

PRESET/TUNING

VIDEO L AUDIO R

USBVIDEO AUX

3 31

INPUT

Front panel

FM/AM

AMFM

AUTO/MAN'L

TUNING MODE

DISPLAY

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

TUNED

VOLUME

A AM 1440 kHz

No colon (:)

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

48 En

FM/AM TUNING

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8

preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station

groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any

preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.

1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”

as the input source.

2 Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception

band.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

for more than 3 seconds.

The preset station number as well as the MEMORY

and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5

seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current

frequency and proceeds toward the higher

frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

You can specify the preset number from which this unit

stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower

frequencies. For details, see “Automatic preset tuning

options” on page 49.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station

number is cleared when you store a new station under the

same preset station number.

• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),

automatic preset tuning automatically stops after

searching for all the available stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station

you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it

manually and store it as described in “Manual preset

tuning” on page 49.

Automatic preset tuning

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

BASS/TREBLE

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

PRESET/TUNING

VIDEO L AUDIO R

USBVIDEO AUX

INPUT

Front panel

FM/AM

Notes

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

AUTO TUNED

VOLUME

MEMORY

A1:FM 87.50MHz

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

Flashes

Flash

49 En

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Automatic preset tuning options

You can specify the preset number from which this unit

stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower

frequencies.

First carry out steps 1 through 3 in “Automatic preset tuning” on

page 48.

• Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/TUNING

l / h to select the preset station number

under which the first station will be stored.

Automatic preset tuning stops when stations have all

been stored up to E8.

• Press PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:)

disappears from the front panel display and

then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning

toward lower frequencies.

You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset

station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)

manually.

1 Tune into a station automatically or manually.

See pages 46 and 47 for tuning instructions.

When this unit is tuned into a station, the front panel

display shows the frequency of the station received.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 5 seconds.

3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset

station group (A to E) while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

The selected preset station group letter appears.

Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel

display.

Note

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

Manual preset tuning

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

BASS/TREBLE

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

PRESET/TUNING

VIDEO L AUDIO R

USBVIDEO AUX

43 2,5

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

TUNED

VOLUME

A AM 630 kHz

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

Flashes

A/B/C/D/E

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

TUNED

VOLUME

MEMORY

C :AM 630 kHz

Preset station

group

Flashes

Colon (:)

50 En

FM/AM TUNING

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

• Press h to select a higher preset station number.

• Press l to select a lower preset station number.

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The station band and frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset station group and

number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator

disappears from the front panel display.

6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other

stations.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station

number is cleared when you store a new station under the

same preset station number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along

with the station frequency.

You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting

the preset station group and number under which it was

stored.

When performing this operation with the remote control, set the

component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER

to select “TUNER” as the input source.

1 Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or

A/B/C/D/E on the remote control) to select

the desired preset station group (A to E).

The preset station group letter appears in the front

panel display and changes each time you press the

button.

Notes

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

TUNED

VOLUME

MEMORY

C3:AM 630 kHz

Preset station number

Flashes

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

TUNED

VOLUME

C3:AM 630 kHz

The displayed station has been stored as C3.

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

Selecting preset stations

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

BASS/TREBLE

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

PRESET/TUNING

VIDEO L AUDIO R

USBVIDEO AUX

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

ON SCREENDAB MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Front panel

Remote control

51 En

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

English

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h on the front

panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote

control) to select the desired preset station

number (1 to 8).

The preset station group and number appear in the

front panel display along with the station band and

frequency.

You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E

and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

See “Selecting preset stations” on page 50.

2 Press and hold EDIT for more than 3

seconds.

“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

TUNED

VOLUME

E1:FM 87.50MHz

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Front panel

Remote control

Exchanging preset stations

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

BASS/TREBLE

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

PRESET/TUNING

VIDEO L AUDIO R

USBVIDEO AUX

1,32,4

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

TUNED

VOLUME

MEMORY

E1:FM 87.50MHz

Flashes

52 En

FM/AM TUNING

3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E

and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

See “Selecting preset stations” on page 50.

4 Press EDIT again.

“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and

the assignments of the two preset stations are

exchanged.

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

TUNED

VOLUME

MEMORY

A5:FM 90.60MHz

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

Flashes

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

TUNED

VOLUME

EDIT E1-A5

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY)

53 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Radio Data System (Europe model only) is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The Radio

Data System function is carried out among the network stations. This unit can receive various Radio Data System data

such as PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), CT (clock time), and EON (enhanced other

networks) when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations.

Use this feature to select one of the 15 Radio Data System

program types and search for all the available preset

stations of the selected program type.

1 Press TUNER on the remote control to select

“TUNER” as the input source.

2 Press PTY SEEK MODE on the remote

control to set this unit to the PTY SEEK

mode.

The name of the program type or “NEWS” flashes in

the front panel display.

To cancel the PTY SEEK mode, press PTY SEEK MODE

on the remote control again.

3 Press PRESET/CH u / d on the remote

control to select the desired program type.

The name of the selected program type appears in the

front panel display.

RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING

(EUROPE MODEL ONLY)

Selecting the Radio Data System

program

AMP

SOURCE

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AU X D VR

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

ON SCREENDAB MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

USBNET RADIOPC/MCX

EFFECT

9010

ENT.

FREQ/TEXT

EONSTARTMODE PTY SEEK

TUNER

STARTMODE PTY SEEK

NEWS

Flashes

Program type Descriptions

NEWS

News

AFFAIRS

Current affairs

INFO

General information

SPORT

Sports

EDUCATE

Education

DRAMA

Drama

CULTURE

Culture

SCIENCE

Science

VARIED

Light entertainment

POP M

Popular music

ROCK M

Rock music

M.O.R. M

Middle-of-the-road music (easy-

listening)

LIGHT M

Light classics

CLASSICS

Serious classics

OTHER M

Other music

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

POP M

Lights up

54 En

RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY)

4 Press PTY SEEK START on the remote

control to start searching for all the available

Radio Data System preset stations.

The name of the selected program type flashes and

the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel

display while this unit is searching for stations.

To stop searching for stations, press PTY SEEK START on

the remote control again.

• This unit stops searching for stations when a station

broadcasting the selected program type is found.

• If the station found is not the one you desire, press PTY

SEEK START again to resume searching for another

station broadcasting the same program type.

Use this feature to receive the EON (enhanced other

networks) data service of the Radio Data System station

network. Once you select one of the 4 Radio Data System

program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT), this

unit automatically searches for all the available preset

stations that are scheduled to broadcast the EON data

service of the selected program type for a certain duration

of time. When the scheduled EON data service starts, this

unit automatically switches to the local station

broadcasting the EON data service and then switches back

to the nationwide station once the EON data service ends.

• You can use this feature only when the EON data service is

available.

• The EON indicator lights up in the front panel display only

when the EON data service is being received from a Radio Data

System station.

1 Press TUNER on the remote control to select

“TUNER” as the input source.

2 Make sure the EON indicator is lit in the front

panel display.

If the EON indicator is not lit in the front panel

display, select another Radio Data System program so

that the EON indicator lights up.

Notes

STARTMODE PTY SEEK

POP M

PTY HOLD

Flashes Lights up

Using the Radio Data System

station network

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AU X D VR

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

ON SCREENDAB MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

USBNET RADIOPC/MCX

EFFECT

9010

ENT.

FREQ/TEXT

EONSTARTMODE PTY SEEK

TUNER

55 En

RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY)

BASIC

OPERATION

English

3 Press EON on the remote control repeatedly

to select one of the 4 Radio Data System

program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO or

SPORT).

The name of the selected program type appears in the

front panel display.

To cancel the EON feature, press EON on the remote control

repeatedly until the name of the program type disappears

and “EON OFF” appears in the front panel display.

Use this feature to display the 4 types of the Radio Data

System information: PS (program service), PTY (program

type), RT (radio text) and CT (clock time). The

corresponding indicators light up in the front panel

display.

• You can select one of the Radio Data System modes only when

the corresponding Radio Data System indicator lights up in the

front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive

all of the Radio Data System data from the station.

• You can select only the available Radio Data System modes

being offered by the station.

• If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit

may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In

particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and

may not be available even when the other Radio Data System

modes are available.

• In case of poor reception conditions, press TUNING MODE

(AUTO/MAN’L) on the front panel so that the AUTO indicator

disappears from the front panel display.

• If the signal strength is weakened by external interference while

this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception

may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front

panel display.

• When the “RT” mode is selected, this unit can display the

program information by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric

characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters

are displayed with the “_” (underscore).

• If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT

WAIT” appears in the front panel display.

1 Press TUNER on the remote control to select

“TUNER” as the input source.

EON

NEWS

Lights up

Displaying the Radio Data System

information

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AU X D VR

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

ON SCREENDAB MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

USBNET RADIOPC/MCX

EFFECT

9010

ENT.

FREQ/TEXT

EONSTARTMODE PTY SEEK

TUNER

56 En

RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY)

2 Press FREQ/TEXT on the remote control

repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data

System display mode.

• Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data

System program currently being received.

• Select “PTY” to display the type of the Radio Data

System program currently being received.

• Select “RT” to display the information on the

Radio Data System program currently being

received.

• Select “CT” to display the current time.

FREQ/TEXT

CTRTPTYPS

Frequency display

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

57 En

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

English

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In

addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and

shape of the room in which we are sitting.

■ Elements of a sound field

There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound

coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument.

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one

surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so numerous

that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct

sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and

shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound

fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be

able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a

dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA

has done with the digital sound field processor.

• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input

source (see page 38).

• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound field programs

are applied.

■ Front panel operations

Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel

repeatedly.

The name of the selected sound field program appears in

the front panel display and in the OSD.

■ Remote control operations

Set the component selector switch to AMP and

then press one of the sound field program

selector buttons on the remote control

repeatedly.

The name of the selected sound field program appears in

the front panel display and in the OSD.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

Selecting sound field programs

Notes

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

BASS/TREBLE

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

PRESET/TUNING

VIDEO L AUDIO R

USBVIDEO AUX

PROGRAM l / h

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

PRESET/CH

STEREO

EFFECT

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

AMP

Sound field program

selector buttons

58 En

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field

processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set “INPUT MODE”

to “AUTO” (see page 35) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.

• The DSP sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken

in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming

from the front, back, left and right.

• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself.

■ For movie/video sources

You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”

can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel

stereo sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.

Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound

field program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 57).

Sound field program descriptions

Notes

Remote

control

button

Sound field program Features Sources

STEREO

2ch Stereo

Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channels or plays back 2-channel

sources as they are.

MULTI

2-CH

MUSIC

Pop/Rock

CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates an enthusiastic atmosphere

where you can feel as if you are in an actual jazz or rock concert.

ENTERTAINMENT

TV Sports

CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound environment of a

large concert hall using the surround sound field to enhance your experience of

watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or

sports programs.

ENTERTAINMENT

Mono Movie

CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces monaural video sources

(such as old movies) at the optimum reverberation level to create sound depth

using only the presence sound field.

ENTERTAINMENT

Game

CINEMA DSP processing. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to

video game sounds.

59 En

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

English

■ For music sources

You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.

Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound

field program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 57).

MOVIE THEATER

Spectacle

CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the extremely wide sound

field of a 70-mm movie theater in detail, making both the video and the sound

field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded in Dolby

Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS, especially large-scale movie productions.

MULTI

2-CH

MOVIE THEATER

Sci-Fi

CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces dialog and sound effects in

the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and

expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films

encoded in Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS in a virtual-space sound field

employing the most advanced techniques.

MOVIE THEATER

Adventure

CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound design of the

newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films similar to the sound field of

the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are

restrained as much as possible.

MOVIE THEATER

General

CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces sounds from 70-mm and

multi-channel soundtrack films characterized by soft and extensive sound field.

SUR. STANDARD

Standard processing for the selected decoder.

SUR. ENHANCED

Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.

Remote

control

button

Sound field program Features Sources

Remote

control

button

Sound field program Features Sources

STEREO

2ch Stereo

Plays back 2-channel sources.

2-CH

STEREO

6ch Stereo

Plays back 2-channel sources from all speakers in 6.1 channels, providing a

larger sound field ideal for background music at parties, etc.

MUSIC

Hall in Vienna

HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces a classic shoe-box type concert

hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely

complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound.

MULTI

2-CH

MUSIC

The Bttm Line

HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the stage front in “The Bottom

Line”, a famous New York jazz club where 300 people can be seated.

MUSIC

The Roxy Thtr

HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the dynamic rock music

environment of “The Roxy Theatre”, one of the hottest rock clubs in L.A. The

listener’s imaginary seat is at the center-left of the hall.

ENTERTAINMENT

Disco

HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the acoustic environment of a

lively disco in the heart of a big city to create a highly concentrated and

energetic sound.

SUR. STANDARD

Standard processing for the selected decoder.

SUR. ENHANCED

Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.

60 En

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory

settings. Although you do not have to change the initial

factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to

better suit the input source or your listening room.

• Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to

initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a

sound field program group (see page 80).

• When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the

initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the

sound field parameter name in the OSD.

• You cannot change the sound field parameter values when

“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON”

(see page 79). If you want to change the sound field parameter

values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.

• For details about the function and control range of each sound

field parameter, see page 61.

• Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field

program parameter settings.

• The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field

programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD.

In this case, press u / d to scroll through pages.

• If you press and hold j / i to change the sound field parameter

value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the

front panel display.

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP.

2 Turn on the video monitor and then press

DISPLAY on the remote control.

The following display is shown in the OSD.

3 Press one of the sound field program

selector buttons repeatedly to select the

desired sound field program you want to

adjust.

4 Press u / d to select the desired sound field

parameter and then j / i to change the

selected sound field parameter value.

•Press i to increase the value.

•Press j to decrease the value.

Changing sound field parameter

settings

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AU X D VR

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

ON SCREENDAB MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDI O

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

AMP

SOURCE

DISPLAY

ON SCREEN

P02 MUSIC

. Pop/Rock

DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB

P.INIT.DLY;;21ms

P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0

S.INIT.DLY;;25ms

S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0

Sound field program category

Sound field parameters Sound field parameter

values

Cursor

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

61 En

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

English

■ Sound field parameter descriptions

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 60 for details.

Sound field parameter Features

DSP LEVEL

DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on

the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level

relative to the level of the direct sound.

Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB

INIT.DLY

P.INIT.DLY

S.INIT.DLY

SB INI.DLY

Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delays. Changes the apparent distance

from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection

heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The

larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set

to a large value.

Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)

1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY)

Source sound

Early

reflections

Time

Delay

Sound source

Reflection face

Level

Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms

Level

62 En

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

ROOM SIZE

P.ROOM SIZE

S.ROOM SIZE

SB ROOM SIZE

Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room sizes. Adjusts the apparent size of the

surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the

sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between

the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the

reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter

from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

LIVENESS

S.LIVENESS

SB LIVENESS

Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the

hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound

source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which

has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as

“dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets

you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.

Control range: 0 to 10

Sound field parameter Features

Level

Time Time Time

Source sound

Early

reflections

Small value = 0.1

Large value = 2.0

Sound source

Source sound

Level

Dead

Live

Time

Time Time

Small reflected

sound

Large reflected

sound

Small value = 0 Large value = 10

63 En

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

English

REV.TIME

Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation

sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment

over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening

room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.

Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s

REV.DELAY

Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and

the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound

begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Control range: 0 to 250 ms

Sound field parameter Features

Reverberation

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

Source sound

REV.TIME

Sound source

Short

reverberation

Long

reverberation

Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s

Early reflections

(dB)

60 dB

Level

Source sound

Reverberation

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

Time

64 En

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

REV.LEVEL

Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the

stronger the reverberation becomes.

Control range: 0 to 100%

2ch Stereo

DIRECT

2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi

stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• The “AUTO” setting bypasses the decoders and DSP processors only when “BASS” and

“TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 33).

• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2

channels and output from the front left and right speakers.

• The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the

subwoofer in the following cases:

– “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 70).

– “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 69) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR”

(see page 70).

6ch Stereo

CT LEVEL

SL LEVEL

SR LEVEL

SB LEVEL

6-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right and surround back levels. Adjusts the

volume level of each channel in the 6-channel stereo mode.

Control range: 0 to 100%

Sound field parameter Features

Source sound

Level

REV. LEVEL

Time

65 En

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

English

The “PRO LOGIC IIx Music”, “PRO LOGIC II Music”, and “DTS Neo:6 Music” parameters can be set only when “SUR.

STANDARD” is selected. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control repeatedly to

select “SUR. STANDARD” (see page 43).

PRO LOGIC IIx Music

PRO LOGIC II Music

PANORAMA

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround

speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF, ON

PRO LOGIC IIx Music

PRO LOGIC II Music

DIMENSION

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards

the front or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)

Initial setting: STD (standard)

PRO LOGIC IIx Music

PRO LOGIC II Music

CENTER WIDTH

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output

completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value

moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to

7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)

Initial setting: 3

DTS Neo:6 Music

C.IMAGE

DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the

center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.

Control range: 0.0 to 1.0

Initial setting: 0.3

Sound field parameter Features

SET MENU

66 En

You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this

unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening

environment.

■ Basic setup BASIC SETUP

Use this feature to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort (see page 29).

■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP

Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.

Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU

Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or

compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.

Input menu 2 INPUT MENU

Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.

SET MENU

Parameter Features Page

A)SPEAKER SET

Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the

crossover frequency.

B)SPEAKER LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of each speaker.

C)SP DISTANCE

Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.

D)CENTER GEQ

Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.

E)LFE LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

G)AUDIO SET

Adjusts the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings.

Parameter Features Page

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.

B)INPUT MODE

Selects the initial input mode of the source.

C)INPUT RENAME

Changes the name of the input source.

D)VOLUME TRIM

Adjusts the output volume of each jack.

67 En

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Network and USB menu 3 NET/USB MENU

Use this menu to manually adjust the network and USB system parameters.

Option menu 4 OPTION MENU

Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.

■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO

Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 40).

Parameter Features Page

A)NETWORK

Configures the network settings automatically or manually.

B)PLAY STYLE

Adjusts the playback style.

C)INFORMATION

Displays the network system information.

Parameter Features Page

A)DISPLAY SET

Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. Sets the OSD display time as

well as the front panel display scrolling mode.

B)MEMORY GUARD

Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings.

C)PARAM. INI

Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.

D)MULTI ZONE SET

Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.

68 En

SET MENU

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

• You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is

reproducing sound.

• If you press one of the sound field program selector buttons

during the “SET MENU” operation, the “SET MENU”

operation is canceled.

• Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each

parameter setting.

• Press RETURN to return to the previous menu level.

You cannot change some “SET MENU” parameters when

“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected as the night

listening mode (see page 34).

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press SET MENU to enter “SET

MENU”.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2 Press u / d to select “MANUAL SETUP”.

3 Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.

The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the

OSD.

4 Press u / d repeatedly and then press

ENTER to select and enter the desired menu.

The following displays are examples where “SOUND

MENU” is selected.

Using SET MENU

Note

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

STEREO

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-A UX DV R

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

ON SCREENDAB MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

2-6

1,7

SET MENU

SRCH MODE



SET MENU

.;BASICSETUP

;MANUALSETUP

.;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

AMP

SOURCE



SET MENU

;BASICSETUP

.;MANUALSETUP

.;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

;MANUAL SETUP

.1SOUNDMENU

2INPUTMENU

3NET/USBMENU

4OPTIONMENU

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

.A)SPEAKERSET

B)SPEAKERLEVEL

C)SPDISTANCE

D)CENTER GEQ

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

1 SOUND

MENU 1/2

.E)LFE LEVEL

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

G)AUDIO SET



[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

1 SOUND

MENU 2/2

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

69 En

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

5 Press u / d repeatedly and then press

ENTER to select and enter the desired

submenu.

The following display is an example where

“SPEAKER LEVEL” is selected.

6 Press u / d to select the desired parameter

and then j / i to change the parameter

settings.

• Press i to increase the value.

• Press j to decrease the value.

7 Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.

Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or

compensate for video signal processing delays when using

LCD monitors or projectors.

■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET

Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.

If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,

you can change these settings according to your preference.

Front speakers FRONT SP

Choices: SMALL, LARGE

• Select “SMALL” (small) if you have small front

speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals

effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left

and right channels are directed to the speakers selected

in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70).

• Select “LARGE” (large) if you have large front

speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals

effectively. All the front left and right channel signals

are directed to the front left and right speakers.

If “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 70), the LFE

signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the low-frequency

signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency

signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all

directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the

“FRONT SP” setting.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, the stored data will be lost in case the power

cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the

power supply is cut off for more than one week.



.FL;;;;;;;;;;

FR;;;;;;;;;;

 C;;;;;;;;;;

B)SPEAKER

LEVEL

-__________+

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

1 SOUND MENU

Note

.A)SPEAKERSET

B)SPEAKERLEVEL

C)SPDISTANCE

D)CENTER GEQ

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

1 SOUND

MENU 1/2

.E)LFE LEVEL

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

G)AUDIO SET



[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

1 SOUND

MENU 2/2

  SMALL>LARGE

FRONT SP

70 En

SET MENU

Center speaker CENTER SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a center

speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the

front left and right speakers.

• Select “SML” (small) if you have a small center

speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals

effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center

channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/

BASS OUT”.

• Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large center speaker

that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All

the center channel signals are directed to the center

speaker.

Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround

speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP

mode (see page 44) and “SUR. B SP” is automatically

set to “NONE”.

• Select “SML” (small) if you have small surround left

and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the

surround left and right channels are directed to the

speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.

• Select “LRG” (large) if you have large surround left

and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are

directed to the surround left and right speakers.

Surround back speakers SUR. B SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a

surround back speaker. The surround back channel

signals are directed to the surround left and right

speakers.

• Select “SML” (small) if you have a small surround

back speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the

surround back channel are directed to the speakers

selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.

• Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large surround back

speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals

effectively. All the surround back channel signals are

directed to the surround back speaker.

Bass out LFE/BASS OUT

Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE

(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.

Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH

• Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a

subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-

frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or

“SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.

• Select “FRNT” (front) if you did not connect a

subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals

of the front left and right channels, and the low-

frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or

“SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right

speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see

page 69).

• Select “BOTH” (both) if you connected a subwoofer.

The low-frequency signals of any source are output

from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the

low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML”

(or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The low-

frequency signals of the front left and right channels

are directed to the front left and right speakers and the

subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see

page 69).

NONE>SMLLRG

CENTER SP

NONE>SMLLRG

SUR. L/R SP

 NONE>SML LRG

SUR. B SP

SWFRFRNT>BOTH

LFE/BASS OUT

71 En

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Crossover CROSSOVER

Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the

speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in

“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 69 and 70). All frequencies

below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer

or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in

“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 69 and 70).

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE

Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if

bass sounds are lacking or unclear.

Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE

• Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the

phase of your subwoofer.

• Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your

subwoofer.

■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL

Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels

between the front left or surround left speakers and each

speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 69).

Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB

Control step: 1.0 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

• Select “FL” to adjust the balance of the front left

speaker.

• Select “FR” to adjust the balance of the front right

speaker.

• Select “C” to adjust the balance of the center speaker.

• Select “SL” to adjust the balance of the surround left

speaker.

• Select “SR” to adjust the balance of the surround right

speaker.

• Select “SB” to adjust the balance of the surround back

speaker.

• Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance of the subwoofer.

“C”, “SL”, “SR”, “SB” and “SWFR” cannot be adjusted if

“CENTER SP” (see page 70), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 70),

“SUR. B SP” (see page 70) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70)

are set to “NONE” respectively.

FREQ;;;80Hz

CROSSOVER

>NORMALREVERSE

02ASUBWOOFER PHASE

Note



.FL;;;;;;;;;;

FR;;;;;;;;;;

 C;;;;;;;;;;

B)SPEAKER

LEVEL

-__________+

72 En

SET MENU

■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE

Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each

speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in

most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay

must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all

sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same

time.

Unit UNIT

Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)

Initial setting:

[Canada model]: feet (ft)

[Other models]: meters (m)

• Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.

• Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.

Speaker distances

Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)

Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)

• Select “FRONT L” to adjust the distance of the front

left speaker.

Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

• Select “FRONT R” to adjust the distance of the front

right speaker.

Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

• Select “CENTER” to adjust the distance of the center

speaker.

Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

• Select “SUR. L” to adjust the distance of the surround

left speaker.

Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

• Select “SUR. R” to adjust the distance of the surround

right speaker.

Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

• Select “SUR. B” to adjust the distance of the surround

back speaker.

Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)

• Select “SWFR” to adjust the distance of the subwoofer.

Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

“CENTER”, “SUR.L”, “SUR.R”, “SUR.B” and “SWFR” cannot

be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 70), “SUR. L/R SP” (see

page 70), “SUR. B SP” (see page 70) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see

page 70) are set to “NONE” respectively.

■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ

Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band

(100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic

equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of

the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You

can make adjustments while listening to the currently

selected source component or a test tone.

Control range: –6 to +6 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

Test tone TEST

Choices: OFF, ON

• Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently

selected source component.

• Select “ON” to output test tones from the front left and

center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the

center speaker.

Press u / d to select a frequency band and j / i to adjust the

selected frequency band.

■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of

your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries

low-frequency special effects which are only added to

certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit

decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Control range: –20 to 0 dB

Control step: 1 dB

Speaker SPEAKER

Adjusts the speaker LFE level.

Headphone HEADPHONE

Adjusts the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70),

some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT

jack.

Note

. UNIT;;;;;;meters

FRONTL;;;;3.00m

FRONTR;;;;3.00m

CENTER;;;;;3.00m

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

C)SP

DISTANCE

Note

.TEST>OFFON



100Hz ;;;;;; 0dB

300Hz ;;;;;; 0dB

1kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

3kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

10kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

D)CENTER GEQ

-______+

.SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;;;0dB

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

E)LFE

LEVEL

73 En

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE

Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range

compression to be applied to your speakers or

headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is

decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.

Speaker SP

Adjusts the speaker compression.

Headphone HP

Adjusts the headphone compression.

Choices: MIN, STD, MAX

• Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low

volume levels.

• Select “STD” (standard) for general use.

• Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest

amount of dynamic range.

■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET

Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this

unit.

Muting type MUTING TYPE

Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function

reduces the output volume (see page 34).

Choices: FULL, –20dB

• Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio

output.

• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.

Audio delay AUDIO DELAY

Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize

it with the video image. This may be necessary when

using certain LCD monitors or projectors.

Control range: 0 to 160 ms

Control step: 1 ms

Tone bypass TONE BYPASS

Use this feature to select whether audio output bypasses

tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are

set to 0 dB (see page 33).

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select “AUTO” if you want signals to bypass tone

control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible.

• Select “OFF” if you do not want signals to bypass tone

control circuitry.

.SP:MINSTD>MAX

HP:MINSTD>MAX

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

.MUTING TYPE;FULL

AUDIO DELAY;;0ms

TONE BYPASS;AUTO

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

G)AUDIO SET

74 En

SET MENU

Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the

input mode or rename the input source.

■ Input/output assignment

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according

to the component to be used if the initial settings of this

unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the

following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and

effectively connect more components.

Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select

the corresponding component by using the INPUT

selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on

the remote control).

For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C

CMPNT-V INPUT [A]

CMPNT-V INPUT [B]

CMPNT-V INPUT [C]

Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR

[B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR

[C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR

For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 OPTICAL OUT (1)

Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,

DVR

For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4

OPTICAL IN (2)

OPTICAL IN (3)

OPTICAL IN (4)

Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,

DVR

(3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,

DVR

(4) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,

DVR

For COAXIAL INPUT jack 5 COAXIAL IN (5)

Choices: (5) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,

DVR

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT

(COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority

is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT

(COAXIAL) jack.

2 INPUT MENU

.A)I/OASSIGNMENT

B)INPUTMODE

C)INPUTRENAME

D)VOLUME TRIM

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter





INPUT



.[A];;;;;DVD

(DVD)

[B];;;;;DTV/CBL

(DTV/CBL)

[C];;;;; DVR

( DVR )



CMPNT-V



INPUT

.(1);;;;;MD/CD-R

(MD/CD-R )



OPTICAL



OUT

Notes

.(2);;;;;MD/CD-R

(MD/CD-R)

(3);;;;; DVD

(DVD )

(4);;;;;DTV/CBL

(DTV/CBL )



OPTICAL



.(5);;;;; DVD

( DVD )



COAXIAL



75 En

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE

Use this feature to set this unit to reset “INPUT MODE”

back to “AUTO” (see page 35) regardless of the previous

setting or to recall the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”,

or “ANALOG”) used for that source whenever you turn on

this unit.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select “AUTO” to reset “INPUT MODE” back to

“AUTO” (see page 35) regardless of the previous

setting whenever you turn on this unit. This unit

automatically selects input signals in the following

order:

(1) Digital signals

(2) Analog signals

• Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically recall

the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”, or “ANALOG”)

used for that source whenever you turn on this unit.

■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the input source

that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.

1 Press one of the input selector buttons on

the remote control to select the input source

you want to change the name of.

2 Press j / i on the remote control to place the

“_” (underscore) under the space or the

character you want to edit.

3 Press u / d to select the character you want

to use and then press j / i to move to the

next space.

• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.

•Press d to change the character in the following order, or

press u to go in the reverse order:

A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#,

*, +, –, etc.)

4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each

input source.

5 Press ENTER on the remote control to exit

from “INPUT RENAME”.

>AUTOLAST

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return



B)INPUT



MODE

DVD-> DVD

[<]/[>]:Position

[]/[]:Chara.



C)INPUT



RENAME

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AUX DVR

Notes

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

76 En

SET MENU

■ Volume trim D)VOLUME TRIM

Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at

each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of

each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume

when switching between input sources.

Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/CBL,

V-AUX, DOCK, DVR, PC/MCX, USB, NET

RADIO, MULTI CH IN

Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB

Control step: 1.0 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

Use this menu to adjust the network and USB system

parameters.

■ Network settings A)NETWORK

Use this feature to view the network parameters (IP

address, etc.) or to change them manually.

The above display is an example.

DHCP DHCP

When this parameter is set to “ON”, network parameters

for “IP”, “SUBNET”, “GATEWAY”, “DNS (P)” and

“DNS (S)” obtained from a DHCP enabled router are

displayed. If DHCP server function is not available, set

this parameter to “OFF” to configure the network

parameters manually.

Choices: ON, OFF

IP address IP

Use this parameter to specify an IP address assigned to

this unit. This value must not duplicate the one used for

other devices in the target network.

Subnet mask SUBNET

Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value

assigned to this unit.

For most of the cases, the subnet mask value can be set as

“255.255.255.0”.

Default gateway GATEWAY

Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default

gateway.

 DVD

DVD-> 0.0dB

[<]/[>]:Adjust

[RETURN]:Exit



D)VOLUME TRIM

3 NET/USB MENU

Note

.A)NETWORK

B)PLAY STYLE

C)INFORMATION

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter





NET/USB



. DHCP ON

IP 192.168.000.002

SUBNET 255.255.255.000

GATEWAY 192.168.000.001

DNS (P) 192.168.000.001

DNS (S) 000.000.000.000

SET >CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter



A)NETWORK

77 En

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Primary DNS server DNS (P)

Secondary DNS server DNS (S)

Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary

and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers.

If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in

“DNS (P)”. If you have two or more DNS addresses, enter one of

them in “DNS (P)” and another in “DNS (S)”.

1 Press u / d on the remote control repeatedly

and then press ENTER to select and enter

the desired network parameter.

When “DHCP” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust

any other network settings. To specify the other parameters,

you need to first set “DHCP” to “OFF”.

To specify the parameter, press

repeatedly

to change the number and press

to select

the digit to change.

3 Press ENTER to confirm the parameter.

4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to configure each

network parameter.

5 Select “SET” and then press ENTER to finish

configuration.

In case you have changed your network configuration, you may

need to reconfigure the network settings again.

You can reset the network settings of this unit to the initial factory

settings by using “N-RESET” in the advanced setup menu (see

page 82).

■ Playback styles B)PLAY STYLE

Use this feature to adjust the playback style according to

your preference. You can shuffle songs in a random order

or repeat one specific song or a sequence of songs.

Repeat REPEAT

Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a

sequence of songs.

Choices: OFF, SINGLE, ALL

• Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “SINGLE” to set this unit to repeat one song.

• Select “ALL” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of

songs.

• When “REPEAT” is set to a setting other than “OFF”, the

highlighted letter “R” appears in the top right corner of the

playback status screen while one song or a sequence of songs

are being repeated.

• If “REPEAT” is set to “SINGLE”, the setting will be reset to

“OFF” when this unit is set to the standby mode.

Shuffle SHUFFLE

Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a

random order.

Choices: OFF, ON

• Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “ON” to set this unit to play songs or albums in a

random order.

When “SHUFFLE” is set to “ON”, the highlighted letter “S”

appears in the top right corner of the playback status screen while

songs or albums are being shuffled.

Note

Notes

Note

.REPEAT;;;;;;;OFF

SHUFFLE;;;;;;OFF

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select



B)PLAY STYLE

78 En

SET MENU

■ Network information C)INFORMATION

Use this feature to display the network system

information.

The above display is an example.

MAC (Media Access Control) address

MAC ADDRESS

This information displays the MAC address that is

assigned to this unit.

Status STATUS

This information displays the current link status of the

network.

Display status: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,

FULL-DUPLEX, HALF-DUPLEX,

NO LINK

“NO LINK” appears when network connection is not made.

Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.

■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET

Dimmer DIMMER

Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel

display.

Control range: – 4 to 0

Control step: 1

•Press j to make the front panel display dimmer.

•Press i to make the front panel display brighter.

Video conversion VIDEO CONV.

Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals

input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “ON” to convert composite and S-video signals

interchangeably and up-convert composite and S-video

signals to component video signals.

• Select “OFF” not to convert any signals.

• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR

OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the

same type of video connections between each component.

• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are

converted to component video signals, the picture quality may

suffer depending on your VCR.

• You must set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” to display the OSD.

• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video

jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such

cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”.

Note

 MAC ADDRESS

XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX

STATUS

10BASE-T

FULL-DUPLEX

[ENTER]:Return



C)INFORMATION

4 OPTION MENU

Notes

.A)DISPLAYSET

B)MEMORYGUARD

C)PARAM.INI

D)MULTI ZONESET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter





OPTION



.DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0

VIDEOCONV.;;;ON

OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0

GRAY BACK;;;AUTO

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select



A)DISPLAY



SET

.ON SCREEN;;;;10s

FL SCROLL;;;CONT



[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select



A)DISPLAY



SET

79 En

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

OSD shift OSD SHIFT

Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.

Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward)

Control step: 1

Initial setting: 0

•Press j to raise the position of the OSD.

•Press i to lower the position of the OSD.

Gray back GRAY BACK

Use this feature to display a gray background in the OSD

when there is no video signal being input.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select “AUTO” to display a gray background in the

OSD when there is no video signal being input.

• Select “OFF” not to display any background in the

OSD.

• Depending on the video signals being input or the system

setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be

displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to

“OFF”.

• Even when “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”, the OSD may not

be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the

picture.

On-screen display time ON SCREEN

Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the

iPod menu or NET/USB menu in the OSD after you

perform a certain operation.

Choices: ON, 10s, 30s

• Select “ON” to display the OSD unceasingly during an

operation.

• Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you

perform a certain operation.

• Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you

perform a certain operation.

Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL

Use this feature to set whether to display the information

(such as song title or channel name) in the front panel

display in a continuous manner or by the first 14

alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once

when “DOCK” or “NET/USB” is selected as the input

source.

Choices: CONT, ONCE

• Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the

front panel display in a continuous manner.

• Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the

front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric

characters after scrolling all characters once.

■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other system settings.

Choices: OFF, ON

• Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD”

feature.

• Select “ON” to protect:

– DSP program parameters

– all “SET MENU” items

– all speaker levels

When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select

and adjust any other “SET MENU” items.

Notes

Note

>OFFON

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return



B)MEMORY



GUARD

80 En

SET MENU

■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI

Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound

field program within a sound field program group. When

you initialize a sound field program group, all of the

parameter values within that group revert to their initial

factory settings.

Press the corresponding sound field program selector

buttons on the remote control to select the sound

field

program that you want to initialize.

An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field

program names that have been changed from their initial

factory settings.

Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT,

MOVIE THEATER, STANDARD

• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter

settings once you initialize a sound field program group.

• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field

programs.

• You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when

“MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON” (see page 79).

■ Zone set D)MULTI ZONE SET

Use this feature to specify the location of speakers

connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals of this unit.

Speaker B setting SP B

Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers

connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.

Choices: FRONT, ZONE B

• Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B

when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B

terminals are set in the main zone.

• Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another zone. If

SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is

turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in

the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at

the SPEAKERS B terminals only.

• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the

sound is output from both headphones and the SPEAKERS B

terminals when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”.

• If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”,

this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode

(see page 44).

Notes

STEREO

*MUSIC

ENTERTAINMENT

MOVIE THEATER

*STANDARD

Press DSP key



C)PARAM.



INI

Notes

.SPB;;;;;;;FRONT



[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return



D)MULTI ZONE



SET

ADVANCED SETUP

81 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional

operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each

parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.

• The settings you make are reflected next time you turn on this unit by pressing STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or POWER on the

remote control) (see page 28).

• Only STANDBY/ON, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and PROGRAM l / h are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu.

• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.

• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.

1 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set

this unit to the standby mode.

2 Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the

front panel, and then press STANDBY/ON to

turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel

repeatedly to select the parameter you want

to adjust.

The name of the selected parameter appears in the

front panel display.

See page 82 for a complete list of available

parameters.

4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front

panel repeatedly to change the selected

parameter setting.

5 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to

save the new setting and set this unit to the

standby mode.

The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this

unit.

ADVANCED SETUP

Notes

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

l PRESET/TUNING h

VIDEO L AUDIO R

USBVIDEO AUX

32,4

1-2,5

STANDBY

/ON

STANDBY

/ON

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

While holding

down

l PROGRAM h

SP IMP.-8 MIN

Currently selected

parameter setting

Currently selected

parameter

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

STANDBY

/ON

82 En

ADVANCED SETUP

■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.

Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit

so that it matches that of your speakers.

Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN

• Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω .

• Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω .

The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems

(A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8ΩMIN”.

■ Factory presets PRESET

Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to

the initial factory settings (see page 95).

Choices: CANCEL, RESET

• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this

unit.

• Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.

• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit

including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the

advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized.

• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on

this unit.

■ Network reset N-RESET

Use this feature to reset the network settings of this unit

(see page 76) to the initial factory settings.

Choices: CANCEL, RESET

• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any network settings of

this unit.

• Select “RESET” to reset the network settings of this

unit.

• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on

this unit.

• When the network settings are reset, “DHCP” in “NET/USB

MENU” is automatically set to “ON” (see page 76) and the

registered client ID of this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000

is cleared (see page 92).

■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP

Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote

control recognition (see page 86).

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library

code is set to “00001”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library

code is set to “00002”.

You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library

code for the remote control (see page 86).

■ Remote control TUNER ID REMOTE TUN

Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for

remote control recognition (see page 86).

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID

library code is set to “81916”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID

library code is set to “81917”.

You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library

code for the remote control (see page 86).

SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level

8ΩMIN

Front

If you use one set (A or B),

the impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

If you use two sets (A and

B), the impedance of each

speaker must be 16 Ω or

higher.

Center

The impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

Surround

Surround back

6ΩMIN

Front

If you use one set (A or B),

the impedance of each

speaker must be 4 Ω or

higher.

If you use two sets (A and

B), the impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

Center

The impedance of each

speaker must be 6 Ω or

higher.

Surround

Surround back

Notes

Note

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

83 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA

and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set the appropriate remote control code for

each input source (see page 85).

■ Controlling this unit

Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this

unit.

These buttons always control this unit regardless of the

component selector switch position.

These buttons control this unit only when the component

selector switch is set to AMP.

■ Controlling a TV

Set the component selector switch to TV to control your

TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate

remote control code for DTV/CBL or (see page 85).

When you set the remote control codes for both

DTV/CBL and , priority is given to the one set for

DTV/CBL.

These buttons always control your TV regardless of the

component selector switch position.

These buttons control your TV only when the component

selector switch is set to TV. For details, see the “Digital TV/

Cable TV” column on page 84.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components

Notes

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

ON SCREENDAB MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

USB

NET RADIO

PC/MCX

STEREO

EFFECT

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AU X DV R

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

FREQ/TEXT EONSTARTPTY SEEKMODE

Notes

Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV

TV POWER Turns on or off the power.

TV VOL +/–

Increases or decreases the volume

level.

TV CH +/– Changes the channel number.

TV MUTE Mutes the audio output.

TV INPUT Changes the input source.

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

ON SCREENDAB MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

USB

NET RADIO

PC/MCX

STEREO

EFFECT

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AU X DV R

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

FREQ/TEXT EONSTARTPTY SEEKMODE

84 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Controlling other components

Set the component selector switch to SOURCE to control

other components selected with the input selector buttons,

or the blank button on the right of MD/CD-R. You

must set the appropriate remote control code for each

input source (see page 85). The following table shows the

function of each control button used to control other

components assigned to each input selector button,

and the blank button on the right of MD/CD-R. Be advised

that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected

component.

This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.

These buttons control your VCR or DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 85).

When you use this button to record a source, press it twice repeatedly to prevent a malfunction.

Press and hold to search backward or forward.

Press and hold to store your favorite Internet radio stations with bookmarks (see page 93).

These buttons are not operational when the Internet radio is selected as the sub input source of NET/USB.

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

STEREO

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-A UX D VR

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

ON SCREENDAB MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

USB

NET RADIO

PC/MCX

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

FREQ/TEXT EONSTARTPTY SEEKMODE

Remote control

DVD player/

recorder

VCR

Digital TV/

Cable TV

LD/CD player

MD/CD

recorder

Tuner

iPod

PC/MCX-2000/

Internet radio/

USB

1 AV POWER

Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1

2 1-9, 0, +10

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Preset stations

(1-8)

3 TITLE

Title Band Bookmark *5

4 PRESET/CH

Up VCR channel up Up

Preset up

(1-8)

Up Up

PRESET/CH

Down

VCR channel

down

Down

Preset down

(1-8)

Down Down

A/B/C/D/E j Left Left

Preset down

(A-E)

Previous menu Previous menu

A/B/C/D/E i Right Right

Preset up

(A-E)

Subsequent

ENTER Enter Enter

Subsequent

5 RETURN

Return Return

6 REC

Disc skip

(player)

Rec (recorder)

Rec *3 Rec *2*3

Disc skip

(CD player) Rec *3 Select PC/MCX

p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play Play

backward

backward *2

backward

backward *4

Select

NET RADIO

forward

forward *2

forward

forward *4

Select USB

AUDIO Audio Audio Audio *2

Sound

(LD player)

e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause

Skip

backward

Skip

backward

Skip

backward *2

Skip

backward

Skip

backward

Skip

backward

Skip

backward *6

Skip

forward

Skip

forward

Skip

forward *2

Skip

forward

Skip

forward

Skip

forward

Skip

forward *6

s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop Stop

7 ENT.

Title/Index Enter Enter

Chapter/Time

(LD player)

Index

(CD player)

Index

8 MENU

Menu Menu Previous menu Previous menu

9 DISPLAY

Display Display Display Display Display Display Display

Notes

85 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can control your TV and other components by setting

the appropriate remote control code for each input source.

For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer

to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of

this manual.

The following table shows the default component in the

“Library (component category)” column and the remote

control code for each input source.

Remote Control Code Default Settings

You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even

if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above.

In this case, try setting other YAMAHA remote control codes.

The blank button is the one on the right of MD/CD-R.

1 Press one of the input selector buttons,

or the blank button on the right of MD/CD-R

to select the component you want to set up.

2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

3 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter

the five-digit remote control code for the

component to be used.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice, and the remote control code for the

selected component is set.

To clear the remote control code previously set for the selected

component, enter the code number “9980”.

• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,

try each of them until you find the correct one.

• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 3, the

setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup

procedure.

Setting the remote control code

Input

source

Library

(component

category)

Manufacturer

Default

code

CD CD YAMAHA 61907

MD/CD-R

MD YAMAHA 70888

DVD DVD YAMAHA 40539

DTV/

CBL

–––

TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 81916

V-AUX/

DOCK

OTHER AUDIO

ACCESSORIES

(iPod)

YAMAHA 81981

DVR DVR YAMAHA 51544

NET/

USB

OTHER AUDIO

ACCESSORIES

(NET/USB)

YAMAHA 81982

–––

Blank

button

TAPE YAMAHA 70524

Note

Notes

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

DOCK USB

CBL

NET

TUNER

V-AUX DVR

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

Flashes

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

TRANSMIT

Flashes

86 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

You can operate multiple YAMAHA receivers or

amplifiers in the same room with the supplied remote

control simultaneously. Set the appropriate library code to

select and operate the desired component with the

supplied remote control.

■ Setting remote control AMP ID library

codes

Select one of the following codes to set the remote control

AMP ID library code for the component you want to use.

1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code

number “00001” or “00002”.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice, and the AMP ID library code is

changed.

The remote control setting

The setting of this unit (see page 82)

• You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID

of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 82).

• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you

may be able to operate the other components

simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,

set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit

separately.

■ Setting remote control TUNER ID library

codes

Select one of the following codes to set the remote control

TUNER ID library code for the component you want to

use.

1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code

number “81916” or “81917”.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice, and the TUNER ID library code is

changed.

The remote control setting

The setting of this unit (see page 82)

• You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER

ID of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 82).

• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you

may be able to operate the other components

simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,

set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit

separately.

Setting library codes

AMP ID

library code

Function

Remote

control AMP

ID *2

00001

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using

the default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

00002

To operate this unit using

an alternative code.

ID2

Notes

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

Flashes

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

TRANSMIT

Flashes

TUNER ID

library code

Function

Remote

control

TUNER ID *2

81916

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using

the default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

81917

To operate this unit using

an alternative code.

ID2

Notes

TUNER

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

Flashes

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

TRANSMIT

Flashes

87 En

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes

previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory

settings.

1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code

number “9981”.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice, and all the remote control codes

previously set are cleared and reset to the initial

factory settings.

If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step

2, the clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the

clearing procedure.

Resetting all remote control codes

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

Flashes

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

TRANSMIT

Flashes

USING IPOD®

88 En

Once you have stationed your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to

the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 22), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.

You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression

artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 37).

• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.

• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other

components” on page 84.

• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in

“TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 100.

You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as

the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done

with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode)

or without it (simple remote mode).

■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote

mode

You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,

stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without

the aid of the OSD of this unit.

• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.

• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.

■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse

mode

You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod

using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD

of this unit. The name of the song being played appears in

the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL”

parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79). You can

also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD.

Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to

suit your personal preferences.

• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.

• The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your

iPod.

• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front

panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are

replaced with underscores “_”.

• The “Setup” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the

OSD. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between the

“Setup” parameter settings.

• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your

iPod in the OSD. Instead, you must use the controls on your

iPod to select the desired photos or video clips.

USING iPod

Notes

Controlling iPod

Notes

89 En

USING iPod®

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

1 Press DISPLAY on the remote control.

The following display appears in the OSD.

2 Press u / d / j / i on the remote control to

navigate the iPod menu and then press

ENTER to begin playback of the selected

song.

Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists),

Albums (albums), Songs (songs),

Genres (genres), Composers (composers)

• Playlists > Songs

• Artists > Albums > Songs

• Albums > Songs

• Songs

• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs

• Composers > Albums > Songs

• Setup > Shuffle, Repeat

Shuffle Shuffle

Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a

random order.

Choices: Off, Songs, Albums

• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in a

random order.

• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in a

random order.

When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the

highlighted letter “S” appears in the top right corner while songs

or albums are being shuffled.

Repeat Repeat

Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a

sequence of songs.

Choices: Off, One, All

• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.

• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of

songs.

When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the

highlighted letter “R” appears in the top right corner while one

song or a sequence of songs are being repeated.

Playlists

Artists

Albums

Songs

Genres

Composers

Setup

iPod Top

DISPLAY

ON SCREEN

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Note

USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES

90 En

This unit is equipped with network and USB features that allow you to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA

files saved on your PC, YAMAHA MCX-2000, USB memory device and USB portable audio player or access the

Internet radio.

• YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.

• For further details about networking, refer to the operation manuals supplied with your network devices. Also refer to technical

reference books, if needed.

• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played.

• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control the network and USB features, see the “PC/MCX-2000/Internet

radio/USB” column in “Controlling other components” on page 84.

• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “Network and USB” section in

“TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 101.

The following diagram shows the construction of the network and USB menu.

Only the available PC servers and MCX-2000 are displayed.

USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES

Notes

Navigating the network and USB menus

Note

NET/USB

PC/MusicCAST

(MCX-2000)

Artists

Albums

Songs

Genres

Popular Stations

New Stations

USB

Recall Play

(MCX-2000

only)

Server* Playlists

Internet Radio

Files/Directories

Help

Locations

Podcasts

Bookmarks

Genres

Selects a song by playlist stored on the server. Refer to the documents of

the server for details about the playlist file format, the process of creating

the playlist file, etc.

Makes this unit recall play from MCX-2000 or another client. For details,

refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000.

Selects a song by genre. In addition, you can select an album within the

genre (MCX-2000 only).

Selects a song by album.

Selects a song by artist. In addition, you can select an album within the

artist (MCX-2000 only).

Selects an Internet radio station that has been added to the “Bookmarks” list (see page 93).

Selects an Internet radio station or a Podcast service by location.

Broadcasts voice-assisted guidelines on various topics of the related Internet service.

Selects a file by navigating directories.

Selects an Internet radio station or a Podcast service by genre.

Selects an Internet radio station from the ones that have recently started the service.

Selects an Internet radio station from the list of popular stations.

Selects a Podcast service by location or genre.

Selects a song directly.

91 En

USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

The following procedure shows the basic steps to navigate

the network and USB menus. See pages 92 and 93 for

details about each sub input source.

“Please wait” may appear whenever it takes time for

communication. This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a

while.

1 Set the component selector switch to

SOURCE and then press NET/USB on the

remote control to select “NET/USB” as the

input source.

The cursor on the left of the NET/USB indicator

lights up in the front panel display, and the contents

previously played for the corresponding sub input

source of NET/USB is automatically played.

2 Press MENU on the remote control to display

the top NET/USB menu.

The following display appears in the OSD.

If any other display appears in the OSD, press MENU

on the remote control repeatedly until the top

NET/USB menu appears.

3 Press u / d to select the desired sub input

source and then press i or ENTER.

You can also select the desired sub input source by pressing

the corresponding button on the remote control (see page 7).

4 Press u / d / j / i on the remote control to

select the desired song or Internet radio

station.

•Press u / d to select the desired menu.

•Press i to enter the selected menu.

•Press j to return to the previous menu level.

•“i” in the right corner of each menu line indicates that

there is a submenu available in the next menu level.

• You can press ENTER or MENU to enter the selected

menu or to return to the previous menu level.

5 Press ENTER to play the selected song or to

listen to the selected station.

Note

USB

NET

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

NET

USB

VOLUME

PC/MCX

AMP

SOURCE

Lights up

PC/MusicCAST

Internet Radio

USB

1/3

NET/USB Top

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

92 En

USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES

Use this feature to enjoy music files saved on your PC or

YAMAHA MCX-2000. MCX-2000 is a music server that

enhances the concept of YAMAHA exclusive

MusicCAST, a digital music delivery method over a

personal network.

1 Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your

PC, or register this unit on your YAMAHA

MCX-2000.

• Refer to “Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0

on your PC” on page 92 and “Registering this unit

on the YAMAHA MCX-2000” on page 93.

• This procedure is needed only the first time.

2 Turn on your PC or MCX-2000.

The PC server or MCX-2000 is added to the server

list on the submenu of PC/MusicCAST.

3 Select a desired PC server or MCX-2000 to

begin playback.

• YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.

• You can connect this unit to up to 4 PC servers and 1

MCX-2000, and each server must be connected to the same

subnet as this unit.

• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files on your PC may not be

playable or may be noisy when played.

• (MCX-2000 only) Files marked with an asterisk (*) have not

been converted to MP3 format. You cannot play back such files

immediately unless you set the “Receive PCM Stream” setting

of this unit to “ON” on MCX-2000. For details, refer to the

instruction manual of MCX-2000.

• While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at

the bottom of the OSD.

• You can use b / a to skip backward/forward and h / s

to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD.

• You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the

“PLAY STYLE” parameters in “NET/USB MENU” (see

page 77).

• You can set whether to display the operation status in the front

panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14

characters after scrolling all characters once by using “FL

SCROLL” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79).

■ Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0

on your PC

With Windows Media Connect 2.0, you can play back the

audio files on your PC. For details refer to the documents

of Windows Media Connect 2.0.

1 Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your

PC.

You can download the installer of Windows Media

Connect 2.0 from the Microsoft website.

2 Turn on your PC and then share a folder on

the PC.

The Shared folder is added to the server list on the

submenu of PC/MusicCAST.

• Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus

software, firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this

unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software

appropriately.

• If you are using a PC with Windows XP Professional, and the

PC is logging on to a domain, you may not be able to connect

the PC server. In such cases, log on to the local machine instead

of the domain.

Using a PC server or YAMAHA

MCX-2000

Notes

93 En

USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Registering this unit on the YAMAHA

MCX-2000

You must register this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000

so that this unit can be recognized by your YAMAHA

MCX-2000. For details, refer to the operation manual

supplied with your YAMAHA MCX-2000.

1 Turn off this unit.

2 Set your YAMAHA MCX-2000 to the “Auto

Config” mode.

3 Turn on this unit.

• MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the

submenu of PC/MCX.

• The client ID of this unit appears in the OSD of

your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (shown as CL-

XXXXX), and this completes the automatic

configuration procedure.

• The latter part of the client ID of this unit is same as the last 5

digits of the MAC address of this unit. For details about MAC

address, see page 78.

• To clear the registered client ID of this unit, use the “Manual

Config” mode of your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (refer to the

instruction manual of MCX-2000) and then set “N-RESET” in

the advanced setup menu of this unit to “RESET” (see page 82).

• The client control functions of MCX-2000 over this unit other

than “View Play Info”, “Receive PCM Stream” and “Edit Client

title” are not available. Avoid using these functions as it will

stop the playback on this unit.

Use this feature to listen to Internet radio stations. This

unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service

particularly customized for this unit, providing over 2000

radio station database. Further, you can store your favorite

stations with bookmarks.

• This service may be discontinued without notice.

• Some Internet radio stations may not be played even if they are

selected in the NET RADIO menu.

• To listen to the Internet radio, connect this unit to your network

(see page 23).

• A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will

not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is

strongly recommended (i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem,

etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP.

• You can use h / s to start/stop playback independently from

the menu in the OSD.

• “Podcast” is a type of the Internet radio service, and there are a

number of Podcast services available on the Internet. The

Podcast is not a continuous service. That is, this unit stops

playback when an episode of the Podcast ends.

• Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access

of this unit to Internet radio stations. In such cases, configure

the security settings appropriately.

■ Storing your favorite Internet radio

stations with bookmarks

Use this feature to select your favorite Internet radio

stations quickly.

Press and hold TITLE on the remote control while

the selected Internet radio station service is

being broadcast.

The stored Internet radio station is added to the

“Bookmarks” list (see page 90).

To remove the stored station from the list, select the item in the

first level of the “Bookmarks” list and then press and hold TITLE

on the remote control.

Notes

Using the Internet radio

Notes

94 En

USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES

Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3

and WMA files saved on your USB memory device or

USB portable audio player connected to the USB port on

the front panel of this unit.

• This unit supports USB mass storage class devices using FAT

16 or FAT 32.

• Only the first partition is displayed in the OSD. You cannot

select files in other partitions.

• Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per

directory are recognized.

• Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the

requirements.

• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may

be noisy when played.

• When you connect your USB memory device or USB portable

audio player, there may be an about 10 seconds delay.

• While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at

the bottom of the OSD.

• You can use b / a to skip backward/forward and h / s

to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD.

• You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the

“PLAY STYLE” parameters in “NET/USB MENU” (see

page 77).

• You can set whether to display the operation status in the front

panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14

characters after scrolling all characters once by using “FL

SCROLL” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79).

Using a USB memory device or a

USB portable audio player

Notes

RESETTING THE SYSTEM

95 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.

• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup

menu parameters will not be initialized.

• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.

To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or STANDBY

on the remote control) to set this unit to the standby mode.

1 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set

this unit to the standby mode.

2 Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the

front panel and then press STANDBY/ON to

turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel

repeatedly to select “PRESET”.

4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front

panel repeatedly to select “RESET”.

Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure

without making any changes.

5 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to

confirm your selection and set this unit to the

standby mode.

RESETTING THE SYSTEM

Notes

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

l PRESET/TUNING h

VIDEO L AUDIO R

USBVIDEO AUX

32,4

1-2,5

STANDBY

/ON

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

STANDBY

/ON

While holding

down

l PROGRAM h

PRESET-CANCEL

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

PRESET-RESET

STANDBY

/ON

TROUBLESHOOTING

96 En

Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the

nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit fails to turn

on or enters the

standby mode soon

after the power is

turned on.

The power cable is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cable firmly.

—

The speaker impedance setting is

incorrect.

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this

unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire

for each connection does not touch anything other

than its respective connection.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

or strong static electricity).

Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the

power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then

use it normally.

—

No sound Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

18-24

“INPUT MODE” is set to “DTS” or

“ANALOG”.

Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO”.

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT

selector on the front panel (or the input selector

buttons on the remote control) and MULTI CH

INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the

remote control).

32, 38

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.

The front speakers to be used have not

been selected properly.

Select the set of front speakers with SPEAKERS A or

B on the front panel or SPEAKERS on the remote

control.

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

—

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control

to resume audio output and then adjust the volume.

“INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”

while playing a source encoded in DTS.

Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”.

Signals this unit cannot reproduce are

being input from a source component,

such as a CD-ROM.

Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this

unit.

—

No picture The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video

jacks.

Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.

97 En

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The sound suddenly

goes off.

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.

27, 82

Check that the speaker wires are not touching each

other and then turn this unit back on.

—

The sleep timer has set this unit to the

standby mode.

Turn on this unit, and play the source again.

—

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control

to resume audio output.

Sound is heard from

the speaker on one

side only.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Incorrect settings in “SPEAKER

LEVEL”.

Adjust the “SPEAKER LEVEL” settings.

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When playing a monaural source with a

CINEMA DSP program, the source signal

is directed to the center channel, and the

front and surround speakers output effect

sounds.

No sound is heard

from the center

speaker.

“CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE”.

Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.

One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for

“6ch Stereo”) has been selected.

Try another sound field program.

No sound is heard

from the surround

speakers.

“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE”.

Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.

This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode

and a monaural source is being played

back.

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel so

that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel

display.

No sound is heard

from the surround

back speaker.

“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE” and “SUR. B SP” is

automatically set to “NONE”.

Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR. B SP” to “SML” or

“LRG”.

“SUR. B SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE”.

Set “SUR. B SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.

No sound is heard

from the subwoofer.

“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is

set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or

DTS signal is being played.

Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.

“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is

set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-

channel source is being played.

Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”.

The source does not contain low-

frequency signals.

98 En

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

Dolby Digital or DTS

sources cannot be

played. (Dolby Digital

or DTS indicator in

the front panel

display does not light

up.)

The connected component is not set to

output Dolby Digital or DTS digital

signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the operating

instructions for your component.

—

“INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”.

A humming sound is

heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

—

The volume level

cannot be increased,

or the sound is

distorted.

The component connected to the AUDIO

OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned

off.

Turn on the power of the component.

—

The sound effect

cannot be recorded.

It is not possible to record the sound effect

with a recording component.

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT

jack.

The source component is not connected to

the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks.

19, 21

Some components cannot record the

Dolby Digital or DTS sources.

A source cannot be

recorded by an

analog component

connected to the

AUDIO OUT (REC)

jacks.

The source component is not connected to

the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.

Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO

IN jacks.

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings of this

unit cannot be

changed.

“MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU”

is set to “ON”.

Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet

and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

—

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears in the front

panel display.

Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.

There is noise

interference from

digital or radio

frequency equipment.

This unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment.

—

The picture is

disturbed.

The video source uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent dubbing.

This unit suddenly

enters the standby

mode.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then

turn it back on.

—

99 En

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Tuner

■ Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multi-path interference.

—

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned into.

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

Set preset stations.

48, 49

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and orient it for the best reception.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Noises result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

—

There are buzzing and

whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set.

—

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The remote control

does not work nor

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-

axis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Reposition this unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.

The remote control code is not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF

REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this

manual.

Try setting another code for the same manufacturer

using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at

the end of this manual.

The library code of the remote control and

the remote control ID of this unit do not

match.

Match the remote control ID of this unit with the

corresponding remote control library code.

82, 86

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

100 En

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ iPod

In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod

(see page 22).

Note

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit is in the middle of recognizing

the connection with your iPod.

This unit is in the middle of acquiring

song lists from your iPod.

Connect error

There is a problem with the signal path

from your iPod to this unit.

Set this unit to the standby mode and reconnect the

YAMAHA iPod universal dock to the DOCK

terminal of this unit.

Try resetting your iPod.

—

Unknown type

The iPod being used is not supported by

this unit.

Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod

mini are supported.

—

iPod connected

Your iPod is properly stationed in a

YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as

YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the

DOCK terminal of this unit, and the

connection between your iPod and this

unit is complete.

Disconnected

Your iPod was removed from a YAMAHA

iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold

separately) connected to the DOCK

terminal of this unit.

Station your iPod back in a YAMAHA iPod universal

dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to

the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Unable to play

This unit cannot play back the songs

currently stored on your iPod.

Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod

are playable.

—

Store some other playable music files on your iPod.

—

101 En

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Network and USB

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The PC server/MCX-2000/

Internet radio does not

function properly.

The IP address is not set properly. Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON.

Alternately, perform manual configuration

according to the current operating environment.

The network cable is not connected. Connect it properly.

The music in the PC

server cannot be played

back.

The PC does not have Windows Media

Connect 2.0 installed in it.

Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 in the PC.

—

The music is recorded in a format that

cannot be played on this unit. This unit

cannot play music formats other than

WMA, MP3 and WAV (PCM format).

Also note that it cannot play certain

music files even if these are recorded in

the WMA, MP3 or WAV format.

Play music recorded in a format that this unit is

compatible with.

—

The music is copyright-protected. This unit cannot play copyright-protected music.

—

Windows Media Connect

2.0 cannot be connected.

The Windows XP PC is logging on to a

domain.

Log on to the local machine instead of the

domain.

—

The MusicCAST server

cannot be connected.

You are attempting to connect to

MCX-1000. The MusicCAST server that

can be connected by this unit is

MCX-2000.

Use MCX-2000 or the PC server.

—

Auto Configuration is not executed. Execute “Auto Configure”.

The Internet radio cannot

be played.

The firewall of the network device is

activated. The Internet radio can be

played only when it passes through the

port designated by each radio station.

The port number is variable depending

on radio station.

Check the firewall setting of the network device.

—

Connection to the Internet is

disconnected.

Check the configuration of the network device,

and then contact the network connection provider.

—

The music files and

directories in the USB

device cannot be viewed.

The music files and directories are placed

in locations other than the FAT area.

Place music files and directories in the FAT area.

—

You are attempting to browse directory

hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory

with more than 500 files.

Modify the data structure on your USB device.

—

The USB device cannot

be recognized.

The connected USB device is other than

a USB mass storage class USB memory

device or USB portable audio player.

This unit can recognize only a USB mass storage

class USB memory device or USB portable audio

player. Also note that it cannot recognize certain

USB devices even when they are devices as

described above.

Some devices may become easier to recognize

when they are inserted before turning this unit on.

“Disconnected” is

displayed even when a

USB device is present.

This unit recognized the USB device as

an illegal device.

Turn this unit off then on again.

102 En

TROUBLESHOOTING

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

Please wait

This unit is in the middle of recognizing

the connection with your network.

This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a

while.

—

This unit is in the middle of recognizing

the connection with your USB memory

device or USB portable audio player.

This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a

while.

—

Please wait

(Starting Server)

This unit is in the middle of waking up

MCX-2000 that has been set to the

standby mode.

Wait for approximately 20 seconds.

—

Connect error

There is a problem with the signal path

from your network to this unit.

Check the connection between this unit and the

LAN port on your router or hub.

Make sure your router is properly connected and

turned on. Also, make sure your modem is

properly connected and turned on when you are

attempting to listen to Internet radio.

Disconnected

Your USB memory device or USB

portable audio player has been

disconnected from the USB port of this

unit.

Check the connection between this unit and your

USB memory device or USB portable audio

player.

—

The PC server or MCX-2000 server

previously connected to this unit no

longer exists.

Connect this unit to the available PC server or

MCX-2000.

There is a problem with the signal path

from your USB memory device or USB

portable audio player to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB

memory device or USB portable audio player to

the USB port of this unit.

Try resetting your USB memory device or USB

portable audio player.

—

Access error

This unit cannot access your USB

memory device or USB portable audio

player.

Try another USB memory device or USB portable

audio player.

—

There is a problem with the signal path

from your USB memory device or USB

portable audio player to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB

memory device or USB portable audio player to

the USB port of this unit.

Try resetting your USB memory device or USB

portable audio player.

—

Unable to play

This unit cannot play back the songs

currently stored on your PC.

Make sure Windows Media Connect 2.0 is

installed on your PC.

—

Check that the songs currently stored on your PC

are playable (MP3, WMA, and WAV).

—

Store some other playable music files (MP3,

WMA, and WAV) on your PC.

—

The network may be overloaded with

heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted.

Try preparing a network exclusively for use with

this unit to separate it from general network

traffic.

—

List updated

The list of the contents stored on your PC

server or MCX-2000 has been updated.

Bookmark ON

The desired Internet radio station has

been added to the “Bookmarks” list.

Bookmark OFF

The stored Internet radio station has been

removed from the “Bookmarks” list.

GLOSSARY

103 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3

front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround

stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio

channels. With an additional channel especially for bass

effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system

has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1

channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround

speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and

surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby

Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to

minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels

and the precise sound orientation generated using digital

sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented

excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound

environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel

configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output

channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a

matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the

2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby

Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks

recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and

realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-

over” and “fly-around” effects.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.

This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel

playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center

channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of

only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology. There are three modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie

sources and “Game mode” for game sources.

■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete

multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel

sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode”

for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for

2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game

sources.

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog

(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is

widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,

and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby

Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital

signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the

volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects

and directionality.

■ DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality

for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully

backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers

to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz

sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/

24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24

master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-

motion video for music programs and motion picture

soundtracks on DVD video.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy

the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of

DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces

practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically,

front left and right, center, surround left and right, and

LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels).

This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-

channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel

to the existing 5.1-channel format.

■ ITU-R

ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU

(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R

recommends a standard speaker placement which is used

in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering

purposes.

GLOSSARY

Audio information

104 En

GLOSSARY

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The

frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low-frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■ MP3

One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It

employs the irreversible compression method, which

achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data

of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be

capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11

(128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to

music CD.

■ Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-

channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables

playback with the full-range channels with higher

separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There

are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources

and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code

Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can

be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,

while the dynamic range representing the sound level

difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.

In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider

the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the

higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the

sound level can be reproduced.

■ WAV

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the

method of recording the digital data obtained by

converting audio signals. It does not specify the

compression (coding) method so a desired compression

method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible

with the PCM method (no compression) and some

compression methods including the ADPCM method.

■ WMA

An audio compression method developed by Microsoft

Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression

method, which achieves a high compression rate by

thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human

ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data

quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a

similar audio quality to music CD.

105 En

GLOSSARY

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB

and P

R signals for the chrominance. Color can be

reproduced more faithfully with this system because each

of these signals is independent. The component signal is

also called the “color difference signal” because the

luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A

monitor with component input jacks is required in order to

output component signals.

■ Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal

is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:

color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite

video jack on a video component transmits these three

elements combined.

■ S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the

S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss

and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

■ CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for

acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room

size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in

the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured

data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original

sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,

Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual

experience of movie theater in the listening room of your

own home.

■ SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for

headphones have been set for each sound field so that

accurate representations of all the sound field programs

can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP

algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field

surround effects even without any surround speakers by

using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to

enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker

system that does not include a center speaker.

Video information Sound field program information

SPECIFICATIONS

106 En

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................... 110 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 Ω ....................................................... 130/165/195/240 W

• Maximum Output Power [Europe model]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 145 W

• IEC Output Power [Europe model]

1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ...................................................... 105 W

• Damping Factor

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω...................................................120 or more

• Maximum Input Voltage

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ................................... 2.2 V or more

• Frequency Response

CD, etc. ................................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB

V-AUX .................................................... 10 Hz to 20 kHz, –3 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)

................................................................................ 0.06% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R ........................... 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ......... 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Tone Control (Front L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/60 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz

• Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ

MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ

• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance

OUT (REC)........................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER ............................................................ 4 V/1.2 kΩ

• Volume Control ........................... Mute/–80 dB to +16 dB/1 dB step

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Format (Gray Back)

[Canada model] ....................................................................NTSC

[Other models] ........................................................................PAL

• Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL

• Rated Input Voltage

Composite ..................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω

S-video (Y) .................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω

S-video (C) ..........................................................0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω

Component (Y) ..........................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω

Component (PB, PR) .................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω

• Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[Canada model] .............................................. 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• Usable Sensitivity (IHF)....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB

• Frequency Response ......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[Canada model] .................................................. 530 to 1710 kHz

[Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[Canada model] ................................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[Europe model] .................................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

• Power Consumption

[Canada model] ..................................................... 350 W/440 VA

[Other models] .................................................................... 360 W

• Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less

• AC Outlets

[Australia model] ......................................... 1 (100 W maximum)

[Canada model] ...................................2 (Total 100 W maximum)

[Europe model] ..................................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)

• Dimensions (W x H x D).................................. 435 x 161 x 391 mm

(17.1 x 6.3 x 15.4 in)

• Weight .................................................................. 11.2 kg (24.7 lbs)

GPL/LGPL

This product includes software code subject to the GNU General

Public License (GPL) or the GNU Lesser General Public License

(LGPL). The copy, distribution, or change of this software code is

licensed under the terms of the GPL or the LGPL. The source

code is available at the following website:

http://www.global.yamaha.com/download/

The source code is also available on a physical media (such as a

CD-ROM) at actual cost.

Contact: AV products division, YAMAHA CORPORATION,

10-1 Nakazawa-cho, Hamamatsu 430-8650, Japan

In principle, the source code is offered for 3 years from the day of

purchase.

SPECIFICATIONS

APPENDIX-i

■ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim

copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and

change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your

freedom to share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its

users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s

software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free

Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License

instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General

Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute

copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source

code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in

new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you

these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain

responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you

must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too,

receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know

their rights.

We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this

license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.

Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone

understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified

by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is

not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the

original authors’ reputations.

Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid

the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses,

in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any

patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND

MODIFICATION

0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed

by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this

General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or

work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any

derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program

or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into

another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the

term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this

License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and

the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on

the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that

is true depends on what the Program does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you

receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately

publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty;

keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any

warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License

along with the Program.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your

option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus

forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications

or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of

these conditions:

a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you

changed the files and the date of any change.

b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in

part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be

licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this

License.

c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run,

you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most

ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate

you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under

these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.

(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print

such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to

print an announcement.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections

of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered

independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do

not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when

you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the

Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License,

whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each

and every part regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work

written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the

distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the

Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution

medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2)

in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above

provided that you also do one of the following:

a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source

code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on

a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any

third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing

source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding

source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a

medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute

corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for

noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object

code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b

above.)

The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making

modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source

code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the

scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a

special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally

distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler,

kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that

component itself accompanies the executable.

If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a

designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same

place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not

compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as

expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,

sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate

your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or

rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long

as such parties remain in full compliance.

5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.

However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program

or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept

this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work

based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and

all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or

works based on it.

6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the

recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,

distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may

not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted

herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this

License.

7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or

for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you

(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of

this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you

cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this

License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not

distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit

royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly

or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this

License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular

circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole

is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other

property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole

purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is

implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous

contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance

on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or

she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot

impose that choice.

APPENDIX-ii

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence

of the rest of this License.

8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries

either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who

places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical

distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted

only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License

incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.

9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the

General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in

spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or

concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a

version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the

option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later

version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a

version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free

Software Foundation.

10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose

distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For

software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free

Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will

be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our

free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY

11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS

NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY

APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING

THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE

PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND

PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE

PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL

NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED

TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER

PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS

PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING

ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE

PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR

DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY

YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO

OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR

OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs

If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the

public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can

redistribute and change under these terms.

To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the

start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each

file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is

found.

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the

terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software

Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY

WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public

License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with

this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place,

Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA.

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an

interactive mode:

Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with

ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and

you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details.

The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts

of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called

something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu

items–whatever suits your program.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if

any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample;

alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program

‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.

<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989

Ty Coon, President of Vice

This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into

proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more

useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you

want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License.

■ GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2.1, February 1999

59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,

but changing it is not allowed.

[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of

the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change

it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to

share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its users.

This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated

software packages–typically libraries–of the Free Software Foundation and other

authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully

about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy

to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our

General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute

copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source

code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in

new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you

these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain

responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must

give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too,

receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must

provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the

library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them

these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we

offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or

modify the library.

To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for

the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the

recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the

original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced

by others.

Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We

wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program

by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any

patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full

freedom of use specified in this license.

Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General

Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain

designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We

use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-

free programs.

When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the

combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original

library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the

entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License

permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.

We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the

user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free

software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These

disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries.

However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.

For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest

possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this,

non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free

library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to

gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General

Public License.

APPENDIX-iii

In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a

greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission

to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the

whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.

Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it

does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom

and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay

close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that

uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter

must be combined with the library in order to run.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND

MODIFICATION

0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which

contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying

it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also

called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.

A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be

conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and

data) to form executables.

The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been

distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library

or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library

or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated

straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without

limitation in the term “modification”.)

“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making

modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all

modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used

to control compilation and installation of the library.

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this

License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is

not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute

a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing

it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that

uses the Library does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source

code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and

appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and

disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to

the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the

Library.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your

option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus

forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications

or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of

these conditions:

a) The modified work must itself be a software library.

b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you

changed the files and the date of any change.

c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third

parties under the terms of this License.

d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be

supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an

argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good

faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such

function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its

purpose remains meaningful.

(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is

entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires

that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if

the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square

roots.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of

that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered

independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not

apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you

distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the

distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for

other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of

who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work

written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the

distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library

(or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium

does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License

instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all

the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU

General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version

than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then

you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change

in these notices.

Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary

GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works

made from that copy.

This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a

program that is not a library.

4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under

Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2

above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-

readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and

2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.

If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated

place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place

satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not

compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is

designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a

“work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of

the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.

However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable

that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather

than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License.

Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.

When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the

Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even

though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work

can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this

to be true is not precisely defined by law.

If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and

accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then

the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative

work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall

under Section 6.)

Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code

for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also

fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.

6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that

uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the

Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the

terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse

engineering for debugging such modifications.

You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it

and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of

this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include

the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the

user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:

a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable

source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the

work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the

work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-

readable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code, so

that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified

executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user

who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not

necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified

definitions.)

b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A

suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library

already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library

functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified

version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version

is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.

c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give

the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no

more than the cost of performing this distribution.

d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a

designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified

materials from the same place.

e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you

have already sent this user a copy.

For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include

any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However,

as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is

normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components

(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,

unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

APPENDIX-iv

It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other

proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a

contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable

that you distribute.

7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side

in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License,

and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of

the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise

permitted, and provided that you do these two things:

a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the

Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed

under the terms of the Sections above.

b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a

work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying

uncombined form of the same work.

8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except

as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,

sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically

terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received

copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses

terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.

However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library

or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept

this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work

based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and

all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or

works based on it.

10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the

recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,

distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions.

You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the

rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third

parties with this License.

11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or

for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you

(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of

this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you

cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this

License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not

distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit

royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly

or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this

License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular

circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole

is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other

property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole

purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is

implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous

contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance

on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or

she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot

impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence

of the rest of this License.

12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either

by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places

the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution

limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or

among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the

limitation as if written in the body of this License.

13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the

Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be

similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new

problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version

number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option

of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version

published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license

version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software

Foundation.

14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose

distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for

permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,

write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.

Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all

derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of

software generally.

NO WARRANTY

15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO

WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY

APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING

THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE

LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND

PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE

LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL

NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED

TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER

PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS

PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING

ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE

LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA

BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR

THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH

ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY

HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries

If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the

public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and

change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively,

under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).

To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach

them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of

warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where

the full notice is found.

This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the

terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free

Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any

later version.

This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY

WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General

Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License

along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59

Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if

any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter

the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ‘Frob’ (a

library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.

<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990

Ty Coon, President of Vice

That’s all there is to it!

APPENDIX-v

LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES

LISTE DES CODES DE COMMANDE

LISTE DER FERNBEDIENUNGSCODES

LISTA DEI CODICI DI TELECOMANDO

LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE MANDO A DISTANCIA

LIJST MET AFSTANDSBEDIENINGSCODES

СПИСОК КОДОВ ДИСТАНЦИОННОГО УПРАВЛЕНИЯ

CABLE TV RECEIVER

ABC 10003

ADB 11230, 11269

AICHI DENSHI11512

AMSTRAD 11222

AUNA 11230, 11269

AUSTAR 10276

BIRMINGHAM

CABLE COMMUNICATIONS

10276

BRITISH TELECOM

10003

CABLE & WIRELESS

11068

DX ANTENNA

11500, 11502

FASTWEB 11630

FRANCE TELECOM

10817, 11734

FREEBOX 11482

FUJITSU 11497

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

10003, 10276

GOLDEN CHANNEL

11110

HOMECHOICE11590

JERROLD 10003, 10276

MACAB 10817

MADRITEL 11230

MASPRO 11510

MOTOROLA 10276, 11106,

11483

MR ZAP 11112

MR. ZAP 11112

NEC 11496

NOKIA 11569

NOOS 10817, 11624

NTL 10003, 11060,

11068

ONO 11068

OPTUS 10276

PACE 11060, 11068,

11577

PANASONIC 10375, 11488

PHILIPS 10817

PIONEER 11021, 11500

PVP STEREO

VISUAL MATRIX

10003

SAGEM 10817, 11112,

11624

SAMSUNG 11060, 11666

SATBOX 10375

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

11510

SONY 11460

STARCOM 10003

SUMITOMO 11500, 11503,

11504

SUPERCABLE

10276

TELE DANMARK

11016

TELEWEST 11068

THOMSON 11110, 11734

TORX 10003

TOSHIBA 11509

TRI-VISION 11257

UNITED CABLE

10003

UPC 11582

US ELECTRONICS

10276

CABLE/PVR

COMBINATION

FRANCE TELECOM11734

FREEBOX 11482

MOTOROLA 11106

NOKIA 11569

NOOS 11624

SUPERCABLE 10276

THOMSON 11734

UPC 11582

DBS/PVR

COMBINATION

@SAT 11300

ATSAT 11300

BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING

11175

CANALSATELLITE

11339

COMAG 11412

DIGIFUSION 11645

DIRECTV 10099, 10639

DREAM MULTIMEDIA

11237

ECHOSTAR 10610

FORCE 11194

FOXTEL 11356

GBSAT 11214

HUMAX 11176, 11427,

11670, 11675

KATHREIN 11221, 11561

MAXIMUM 11334

NOKIA 11310, 11311

OPENTEL 11412

PACE 11423, 11623

PANASONIC 11320

PHILIPS 10099

REBOX 11214

SAGEM 11253, 11307,

11692

SHARP 11489

SIEMENS 11657

SKY 11175, 11848,

11850

SKYPLUS 11412

SONY 10639

STRONG 11300

THOMSON 11534, 11900

TOPFIELD 11206, 11545

TPS 11253, 11307

ZEHNDER 11075, 11412

SATELLITE RECEIVER

@SAT 11300

@SKY 11334

ABSAT 10713

ADB 10642, 11259,

11367, 11473,

11491

AIWA 11514, 11515

AKAI 10200

ALBA 10713, 11284

ALLSAT 10200, 11017,

11043

ALLSONIC 10369

ALLTECH 10713

ALLVISION 11232, 11334,

11412

AMITRONICA 10713

AMPERE 10132

AMSTRAD 10132, 10713,

10847, 10885,

11113, 11175

ANGLO 10713

ANKARO 10369, 10713,

11279

ANTSAT 11017, 11083

ARCON 11043, 11075,

11279

ARNION 11300

ASAT 10200

ASCI 10114, 11334,

11461

ASLF 10713

ASSCOM 10853

ASTON 11129

ASTRA 10713

ASTRO 10133, 10173,

10369, 10658,

11099, 11100,

11113

ATSAT 11300

ATSKY 11334

AUDIOLINE 11429

AURORA 10879

AUSTAR 10642, 10879,

11259

AXIS 10369, 11111

B@YTRONIC 11412

BENTLEY WALKER

11017

BEST 10369

BIG SAT 11457

BLACK DIAMOND

11284

BLAUPUNKT 10173

BLUE SKY 10713

BOCA 10132, 10713,

11232, 11366,

11474

BOSTON 11251

BRAINWAVE 10658

BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING

10847, 11175

BROCO 10713

BSKYB 10847, 11175

BT 11296

BUBU SAT 10713

BUSH 11284, 11471,

11672

CANAL DIGITAL

10853, 11622

CANAL+ 10853

CANALSATELLITE

10853, 11339,

11853

CENTREX 11457

CGV 11413

CHESS 10114, 10713,

11334

CITYCOM 10299, 10818,

11075, 11176,

11232

COLOMBIA 10132

COLUMBIA 10132

COMAG 10132, 11232,

11366, 11412,

11413, 11579

CONDOR 10369

CONRAD 10132, 10369

COSHIP 11457

CYRUS 10200

D-BOX 10873

DAEWOO 10713, 11111,

11296, 11743

DELTASAT 11075

DGTEC 11242

DIGENIUS 10299, 11161

DIGIALITY 11685

DIGIFUSION 11645

DIGIQUEST 11457, 11473

DIGISAT 11232

DIGISKY 11457

DIGITALL WORLD

11227

DIJAM 11296

DIRECTV 10099, 10639

DISTRATEL 10885, 11283,

11704

DMT 11075

DNT 10200

DREAM MULTIMEDIA

11237

DUNE 10369

DX ANTENNA 11530

ECHOSTAR 10167, 10610,

10713, 10853,

11200, 11323,

11409, 11467,

11473, 11477

EINHELL 10132, 10713

ELAP 10587, 10713,

11129, 11567

ELSAT 10713

ELTA 10200, 10369

EMME ESSE 10369

EMTECH 11214

ENGEL 10713, 11017,

11251

APPENDIX-vi

EURIEULT 10885

EUROLINE 11251

EUROPHON 10132, 10299

EUROSKY 10114, 10132,

10262, 10299,

10369

EUROSTAR 10818, 10898

EUTELSAT 10713

FENNER 10369, 10713

FERGUSON 10711, 11291

FINLUX 10573

FLAIR MATE 10713

FMD 11457

FORCE 11194

FORTEC STAR 11017, 11083

FOXTEL 10879, 11356

FRACARRO 10125

FTEMAXIMAL10369, 10713,

11556

FUBA 10173, 10262,

10299, 10369,

10573, 11161,

11214

FUGIONKYO 10125

GALAXIS 10369, 10853,

11111, 11557

GARDINER 10818

GARNET 11075

GBSAT 11214

GECCO 11157, 11273,

11412

GENERAL SATELLITE

11176

GF 11043

GF STAR 11043

GLOBO 11251, 11626

GOD DIGITAL 10200

GOLD BOX 10292, 10853

GOLDEN INTERSTAR

11283

GOLDVISION 11017

GOODMANS 11246, 11284

GRUNDIG 10173, 10847,

10853, 10879,

11291

HAENSEL & GRETEL

10132

HANDAN 11622

HANSEATIC 11099, 11100

HAUPPAUGE 11672

HB 11214

HDT 11011

HE@D 11279

HIRSCHMANN10125, 10173,

10299, 10369,

10573, 11111,

11232, 11412

HITACHI 11250, 11284,

11518, 11523,

11525

HUMAX 11176, 11225,

11427, 11648,

11670, 11675,

11743

HUTH 10132, 11017,

11075

HYUNDAI 11011, 11075

ICAN 11367

ID DIGITAL 11176

ILLUSION SAT11557

IMPERIAL 11429

INGELEN 10114

INTERNATIONAL

10132

INTERSTAR 11017, 11214

JAEGER 11334

JVC 11507, 11531,

11532

K-SAT 10713

KAMM 10713

KAON 11300

KATELCO 11111

KATHREIN 10114, 10173,

10200, 10249,

10442, 10480,

10504, 10553,

10622, 10658,

10713, 10818,

10898, 11221,

11416, 11561,

11567

KENNEX 10125

KENWOOD 10853

KEY WEST 10132

KITON 10114

KOSCOM 11043

KOSMOS 10442

KREILING 10114, 10249,

10658, 11461

KREISELMEYER

10173

L&S ELECTRONIC

10132, 10369,

11043, 11334

LABGEAR 11296

LASAT 10132, 10173,

10299, 10369

LEMON 11461

LENCO 10369, 10713

LENOXX 11611

LG 11075, 11226

LIFESAT 10132, 10299,

10369, 10713,

11043

LIFETEC 10587

LODOS 11284

LOGIX 11017, 11075

LORENZEN 10132, 10299,

10867, 11161,

11579

LUPUS 10369

LUXOR 10573

LUXORIT 11681

M VISION 11557

MANATA 10132, 10713

MANHATTAN 11017, 11083

MARANTZ 10200

MASPRO 10173, 10713,

11520, 11530

MATSUI 10173, 11284

MAXIMUM 11075, 11334,

11685

MDS 11225

MEDIACOM 11206

MEDIASAT 10292, 10853

MEDION 10132, 10299,

10369, 10713,

11043, 11075,

11232, 11334,

11412, 11626

MEDISON 10713

MEGA 10200

MELECTRONIC

10818

METRONIC 10132, 10713,

10818, 10885,

11279, 11283,

11334, 11691,

11704

METZ 10173

MICRO 10713

MICRO ELEKTRONIC

10713

MICROMAXX 10299, 10369

MICROSTAR 11075

MICROTEC 10713

MORGAN'S 10132, 10200,

10713, 11232,

11412

MULTICHOICE10642, 10879

MYRYAD 10200

MYSAT 10713

NEC 11270, 11519

NEOTION 11334

NETGEM 11322

NETSAT 10099

NEUF TELECOM

11322

NEUF TV 11322

NEUHAUS 10713

NEULING 10132, 11232

NEUSAT 10587, 10713,

11279

NEVELING 11161

NEXTWAVE 11017

NIKKO 10200, 10713

NOKIA 10573, 10751,

10853, 10873,

11023, 11223,

11310, 11311,

11723

NORDMENDE 11611

OKANO 10442

OPENTEL 11232, 11412

OPTEX 10114, 10713,

11043, 11283

OPTUS 10879

ORBIS 11232, 11334,

11412

ORBITECH 10114, 10541,

11099, 11100

P/SAT 11232

PACE 10200, 10329,

10720, 10847,

10853, 10867,

11175, 11323,

11423, 11623,

11850

PACIFIC 11284

PACKARD BELL

11111

PALCOM 10299, 10587,

11161, 11409

PANASAT 10879

PANASONIC 10847, 11104,

11304, 11320,

11404, 11508,

11526, 11527,

11528

PANDA 10173

PANSAT 11011

PATRIOT 10132

PHILIPS 10099, 10133,

10173, 10200,

10292, 10818,

10853, 10898,

11114, 11118,

11672

PHONOTREND11017, 11200

PILOTIME 11339

PINO 11334

PIONEER 10292, 10329,

10352, 10853,

11308

PLASMATIC 10442

PMB 10713

PREISNER 10132, 10262,

11113, 11366

PREMIER 10292

PREMIERE 10292, 10873,

11429

PRIMACOM 11111

QUADRAL 10369

QUELLE 10299

RADIOLA 10200

RADIX 11113

RCA 11291

REBOX 11214

RED STAR 10369

REGAL 11251

RFT 10200, 10541

ROADSTAR 10713, 10853

ROVER 10369, 10713

S-ZWO 11207

SAB 11251

SABA 10885

SAGEM 10820, 11114,

11253, 11307,

11690, 11691,

11692, 11694

SAMSUNG 10853, 11017,

11206, 11243,

11293, 11458,

11570

SANYO 11219

SAT CONTROL11300

SAT TEAM 10713

SATEC 10713

SATELCO 10369, 11232

SATPLUS 11100

SATSTATION 11083

SCHAUB LORENZ

11214

SCHNEIDER 11206, 11251

SCHWAIGER 10132, 10504,

10587, 10885,

11075, 11083,

11111, 11334,

11412, 11457,

11474

SCS 10299

SEDEA ELECTRONIQUE

10125, 10132,

11206, 11283

SEG 10114, 10369,

11075, 11251,

11626

SEPTIMO 10885

SERINO 10610

SERVISAT 10713, 11251

SHARP 10541, 11489,

11513, 11517

SIEMENS 10173, 11657

SILVA 10299

SKANTIN 10713

SKARDIN 10587

SKR 10713

SKT 11449

SKY 10099, 10847,

11175, 11848,

11849, 11850

SKY ITALIA 11848, 11849

SKY XL 11251, 11412

SKY+ 11175

SKYMASTER 10587, 10713,

11075, 11200,

11409, 11611

SKYMAX 10200

SKYPLUS 11232, 11334,

11412

APPENDIX-vii

SKYSAT 10114, 10713

SKYVISION 11334

SL 10132, 10299

SM ELECTRONIC

10587, 10713,

11200, 11409

SMART 10132, 10299,

10713, 11113,

11157, 11232,

11273, 11413

SONY 10282, 10292,

10639, 10847,

10853, 11524,

11558

SR 10132

STARLITE 10200

STREAM 11848

STRONG 10125, 10132,

10369, 10713,

10820, 10853,

10879, 11146,

11157, 11258,

11300, 11409,

11430, 11626

SUNNY 11300

SUNNY SOUND

10369

SUNSAT 10713

SUNSTAR 10132, 10369,

10642

SYSTEC 11334

TARBS 11225

TBOSTON 11457

TEAC 11225, 11227,

11251, 11322

TECHNISAT 10114, 10200,

10262, 10541,

11099, 11100,

11322

TECHNOMATE

11283, 11610

TECHNOSONIC

11672

TECHNOTREND

11429

TECHNOWELT10132

TECHSAN 11017

TECHWOOD 10114, 11284

TEKCOMM 11017

TELE SYSTEM ELECTRONIC

11611

TELECIEL 11043

TELEKA 10262

TELESTAR 10114, 11099,

11100, 11251,

11334

TELESYSTEM 11251, 11409

TELETECH 10114

TELEVES 10132, 11214,

11300

TELEWIRE 11232

TEVEBOX 11681

TEVION 10713, 11409,

11622

THOMSON 10292, 10711,

10713, 10820,

10847, 10853,

11046, 11175,

11291, 11498,

11534, 11900

TINY 11672

TIOKO 10132

TOKAI 10200

TONNA 10587, 10713,

11611

TOPFIELD 11206, 11207,

11208, 11545,

11722

TOSHIBA 11501, 11516,

11530

TPS 10820, 11253,

11307

TRIAD 10372

TRIAX 10114, 10132,

10200, 10713,

10853, 11099,

11113, 11157,

11227, 11251,

11291, 11296

TT-MICRO 11429

TURNSAT 10713

TWINNER 10713

UEC 10879

UNIDEN 11521

UNISAT 10132, 10200

UNITED 11251

UNIVERSUM 10114, 10173,

10299, 11099,

11251

VAN HUNEN 11161

VARIOSAT 10173

VEGA 10369

VENTANA 10200

VESTEL 10114, 11251

VISIONIC 10125, 11279,

11283

VISIOSAT 10114, 10713,

11129, 11457

VTECH 10818

WISI 10173, 10299,

10372, 10406,

10638

WISPLUS 11258

WORLDSAT 10114, 11214,

11251, 11323

XRYPTON 10369

XSAT 10713, 10847,

11214, 11323

XTREME 11300

YAKUMO 11413

ZEHNDER 10114, 10369,

10504, 10818,

11075, 11232,

11251, 11334,

11412, 11413

HDTV DECORDER

PIONEER 11010

SHARP 11010

Documenttranscriptie

G CD RECORDER DENON HHB JVC 70626, 70766 70192 71294 KENWOOD LG MARANTZ NAD PHILIPS PIONEER RCA SONY TDK TEAC VICTOR YAMAHA 70626 71208 70626 71208 70626 70192, 71087 70420 70000 71208 70420 70072, 71294 70888, 71292 MD RECORDER DENON KENWOOD OPTIMUS PIONEER SHARP SONY TECHNICS YAMAHA 70873 70681 71063 71063 70861, 71684 70490 71078 70490, 70888, 71909 TAPE DECK AIWA 70029, 70197 AKAI 70189, 70283 ARCAM 70076 CARVER 70029 DENON 70076 EROICA 70189 GARRARD 70308, 70309 GRUNDIG 70029 HARMAN/KARDON 70029 INKEL 70070 JVC 70244, 70273 KENWOOD 70070, 70205 MAGNAVOX 70029 MARANTZ 70029 MITSUBISHI 70189, 70283 MYRYAD 70029 ONKYO 70135, 70282 OPTIMUS 70027, 70220 ORION 70308, 70309 PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER POLK AUDIO RADIOLA RCA REVOX SANSUI SHARP SONY TEAC TECHNICS THORENS VICTOR WARDS YAMAHA 70229 70029, 70229 70027, 70220 70029 70029 70027, 70220 70029 70029 70205, 70231 70170, 70243 70283, 70289, 70308, 70309 70229 70029 70244, 70273 70027, 70029 70097, 70205, 70524 TUNER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 81467 AIWA 80158, 80189 AKAI 80115, 80609 ANAM 80281, 80609 ARCAM 80189 CAIRN 80189 CAMBRIDGE 80189 CAMBRIDGE AUDIO 81455, 81647 CARVER 80189 DENON 80004, 80273 DUAL 80004 GARRARD 80281 GOLDMUND 80189 GOLDSTAR 80281 GOODMANS 80609 GRADIENTE 80281 GRUNDIG 80189, 80281 HARMAN/KARDON 80110, 80189 INKEL 80027, 80066 JBL 80110 JVC 80074 KENWOOD 80027, 80645 LG 80281 LINN 80189 © 2006 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA LOEWE 80189 MAGNAVOX 80189 MARANTZ 80189 MEMOREX 80014 MICROMEGA 80189 MUSICAL FIDELITY 80445 MYRYAD 80189 NAD 80320, 80609 NIKKO 80609 ONKYO 80103, 80119 PANASONIC 80309, 80518 PHILIPS 80189 PIONEER 80014 POLK AUDIO 80189 RADIOLA 80189 RESTEK 80189 REVOX 80140, 80189 SANSUI 80189, 80609 SHERWOOD 80066 SIEMENS 80609 SONIC 80281 SONY 80158 SOUNDWAVE 80609 TEAC 80110, 80609 TECHNICS 80309, 80518, 81135 TECHWOOD 80281, 80609 THORENS 80189 UNIVERSUM 80189, 80281, 80609 VICTOR 80074 WARDS 80014, 80158, 80189 YAMAHA 80293, 81908 (TUNER ID1) 81916 (TUNER ID2) 81917 ZENITH 80281 HTR-N5060 QUAD 60157 QUASAR 60029 RADIOLA 60157 RADIOTONE 60625 RCA 60032, 60179 REALISTIC 60179 RESTEK 60157 REVOX 60157 ROTEL 60157, 60897 SAE 60157 SAMSUNG 60524 SANSUI 60157, 60625 SANYO 60179 SEG 60625 SHARP 60034 SHERWOOD 60426 SIEMENS 60157, 60362 SIMAUDIO 60157 SONIC FRONTIERS 60157 SONY 60000 STS 60018 SUPERTECH 60625 SYNERGY 60625 TAG MCLAREN 60157 TANDY 60032 TEAC 60362, 60393, 60625, 60643 TECHNICS 60029, 60207, 60303 TECHWOOD 60362 THORENS 60157 THULE AUDIO60157 TOSHIBA 60299, 60481 TRAXDATA 60626 UNIVERSUM 60157, 60362, 60524 WARDS 60000, 60032, 60157, 60179 YAMAHA 60036, 61907 YBA 60625 HTR-N5060 AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES YAMAHA (iPod) 81981 YAMAHA (NET/USB) 81982 All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WG73970 OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Avoid installing this unit where a foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit during a lightning storm. Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. Install this unit near the AC wall outlet where the power cable plug can be reached easily. Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit to the standby mode, and then disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is set to the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. CONTENTS FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION Automatic tuning ..................................................... 46 Manual tuning.......................................................... 47 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 48 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 49 Selecting preset stations........................................... 50 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 51 RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY).............................53 Selecting the Radio Data System program .............. 53 Using the Radio Data System station network ........ 54 Displaying the Radio Data System information ...... 55 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS CONNECTIONS .................................................. 12 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 57 Sound field program descriptions............................ 58 Changing sound field parameter settings................. 60 ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU ............................................................66 Using SET MENU................................................... 68 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 69 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 74 3 NET/USB MENU................................................. 76 4 OPTION MENU................................................... 78 ADVANCED SETUP ............................................81 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................83 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 83 Setting the remote control code ............................... 85 Setting library codes ................................................ 86 Resetting all remote control codes........................... 87 USING iPod® .........................................................88 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS BASIC SETUP ...................................................... 29 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS .............................57 BASIC OPERATION Placing speakers....................................................... 12 Connecting speakers ................................................ 13 Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 16 Audio and video signal flow.................................... 17 Connecting a TV...................................................... 18 Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB................................................. 19 Connecting a CD player, an MD player or a tape deck....................................................... 21 Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock ........ 22 Connecting the network........................................... 23 Connecting a multi-format player, an external decoder or a sound processor .............................. 24 Connecting a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player .................................... 24 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 25 Connecting the power cable..................................... 26 Setting the speaker impedance................................. 27 Turning on and off the power .................................. 28 PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control........................................................... 6 Front panel display .................................................... 9 Rear panel ................................................................ 11 FM/AM TUNING..................................................46 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Controlling iPod ...................................................... 88 BASIC OPERATION USING VIDEO FEATURES ............................... 40 Displaying the input source information ................. 40 Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 41 Playing video sources in the background ................ 41 RESETTING THE SYSTEM...............................95 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................96 GLOSSARY.........................................................103 Audio information ................................................. 103 Video information.................................................. 105 Sound field program information .......................... 105 SPECIFICATIONS.............................................106 English ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND .................... 42 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Using SILENT CINEMA ........................................ 34 Muting the audio output........................................... 34 Selecting the night listening mode........................... 34 Selecting the input mode ......................................... 35 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 35 Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 36 Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode... 37 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 38 Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo............................................... 39 Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 39 Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound.............................. 39 Navigating the network and USB menus ................ 90 Using a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000........................................................... 92 Using the Internet radio ........................................... 93 Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player ........................................... 94 ADVANCED OPERATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 32 USING AUDIO FEATURES............................... 34 USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES...............90 Enjoying multi-channel sources in 6.1-channel surround ....................................... 42 Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround.................. 43 Using Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 44 RECORDING ....................................................... 45 1 En FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 6-channel power amplifier Network features ◆ Minimum RMS output power (1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω) Front: 110 W + 110 W Center: 110 W Surround: 110 W + 110 W Surround back: 110 W ◆ LAN port to connect a PC and YAMAHA MCX-2000 or access the Internet radio via a LAN ◆ DHCP automatic or manual network configuration Sound field programs ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/24 decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/ Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) Radio Data System (Europe model only) ◆ Radio Data System tuning capability iPod controlling capability ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately), which supports iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2003 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All right reserved. iPod® “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. 2 En USB features ◆ USB port to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player Other features ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system ◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability (3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT) ◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video → component video) capability for monitor out ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, backlighting input selector buttons, and an iPod (stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal) controlling capability ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to that of a high-quality stereo This receiver supports network connections. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. This unit contains programs licensed under the GNU General Public License and GNU Lesser General Public License. Windows XP, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft corporation in the United States and/or countries. GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED Check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control CODE SET POWER AM loop antenna 1 3 TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD SLEEP MULTI CH IN CBL DVD Installing batteries in the remote control INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME DOCK USB 2 AMP SOURCE TV TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 MOVIE ENT. 10 EFFECT PRESET/CH SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE Indoor FM antenna (Canada model) ENTER 1 Take off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6, UM-3) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN REC AUDIO PC/MCX NET RADIO FREQ/TEXT MODE USB PTY SEEK START EON Batteries (2) (AA, R6, UM-3) Indoor FM antenna (Europe and Australia models) About this manual • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions: – the operation range of the remote control decreases. – the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use an old battery together with a new one. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control code that may have been cleared. English • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. Notes 3 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 0 VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING MODE LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L NEXT EDIT INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE VIDEO SILENT CINEMA A B CD E F 1 STANDBY/ON Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode (see page 28). Notes • In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. • When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. 2 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control (see page 8). 3 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit (see page 9). 4 PRESET/TUNING, EDIT • Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h between selecting preset station numbers and selecting the tuning frequency. • Edits the assignments of preset stations (see page 51). 4 En G H I J L AUDIO R K 5 FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 46). 6 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT • Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 49). • Selects the speaker channel whose output level you want to adjust when “TUNER” is not selected as the input source (see page 36). 7 PRESET/TUNING l / h, LEVEL +/– • Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when “TUNER” is selected as the input source. The colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see page 50). • Selects the tuning frequency when “TUNER” is selected as the input source. The colon (:) is not displayed in the front panel display (see page 46). • Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using NEXT when “TUNER” is not selected as the input source (see page 36). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS E BASS/TREBLE +/– Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left and right speakers in conjunction with TONE CONTROL (see page 33). 9 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned off) (see page 46). F PROGRAM l / h Selects sound field programs (see page 33). 0 VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. y This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level. A PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones (see page 34). Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack or the speaker terminals. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. B SPEAKERS A/B Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. C STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the “STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multichannel input signals are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing (see page 39). D TONE CONTROL Selects “BASS” or “TREBLE” to adjust the tonal balance of the front left and right speakers in conjunction with BASS/TREBLE +/– (see page 33). G INPUT MODE Selects either digital or analog input signals exclusively or sets this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the corresponding input signals when one component is connected via both digital and analog connections (see page 35). INTRODUCTION 8 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a preset station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning (see page 48). H INPUT selector Selects the desired input source. I MULTI CH INPUT Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38). Note The input source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks takes priority over the source selected with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). J VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player (see page 24). y To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. Note The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. K USB port Use to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player (see page 94). English 5 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 83. Note The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area below depends on the component selector switch position. Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. To control the TUNER functions, set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 2 0 CODE SET POWER TV A TRANSMIT POWER STANDBY POWER B AV MD CD SLEEP CD-R 3 DVD DTV D TUNER DOCK V-AUX USB DVR NET AMP SOURCE TV VOL C MULTI CH IN CBL TV CH VOLUME E F TV 4 G TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. MOVIE 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 ■ Controlling this unit Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate (see page 8). 2 CODE SET Use to set up remote control codes (see page 85). 3 Input selector buttons Select the input source you want to control. Note The corresponding input selector button for the currently selected input source lights up for approximately 5 seconds after you press any buttons on the remote control, showing which source component is currently being operated. 4 Sound field program selector buttons Select sound field programs (see page 57). – Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in surround (see page 43). – Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and 6.1-channel playback of multi-channel sources (see page 42). – Use DIRECT ST. to play back 2-channel sources in hi-fi stereo sound (see page 39). 5 SPEAKERS Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel. Press this button repeatedly to toggle as follows: A on 5 6 7 ENT. 10 EFFECT PRESET/CH SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE 8 H I J ENTER B on A and B off 6 ENHANCER Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode (see page 37). A/B/C/D/E 9 RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN K REC AUDIO PC/MCX NET RADIO FREQ/TEXT MODE USB PTY SEEK START EON L M 7 LEVEL Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the output level (see page 36). 8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i, ENTER Select and adjust the sound field program parameters or the “SET MENU” parameters. 9 RETURN Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters. 6 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 0 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared signals. J SET MENU Enters “SET MENU” (see page 68). B POWER Turns on this unit (see page 28). K DISPLAY Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video monitor (see page 41). C SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (see page 35). L Network and USB input selector buttons Select the sub input source of NET/USB (see page 90). D MULTI CH IN Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source when using an external decoder, etc. (see page 38). PC/MCX Selects a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000 as the sub input source of NET/USB. E VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. NET RADIO Selects the Internet radio as the sub input source of NET/USB. F Component selector switch Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area. USB Selects a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player as the sub input source of NET/USB. AMP Operates this unit. SOURCE Operates the component selected with an input selector button (see page 84). TV Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or (see page 83). Notes Notes • Press NET/USB to select “NET/USB” as the input source before you press any of the network and USB input selector buttons stated above to select the corresponding sub input source of NET/USB. • When you press any of the network and USB input selector buttons, the contents previously played for the corresponding sub input source of NET/USB is automatically played. M Radio Data System tuning buttons (Europe model only) • To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 85. • When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and (see page 85), priority is given to the one set for DTV/ CBL. FREQ/TEXT Switches the Radio Data System display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers the corresponding data services) and the frequency display (see page 55). G MUTE Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level (see page 34). PTY SEEK MODE Sets this unit to the PTY SEEK mode (see page 53). H STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the “STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multichannel input signals are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing (see page 39). INTRODUCTION A STANDBY Sets this unit to the standby mode (see page 28). I NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 34). PTY SEEK START Starts searching for a station once the desired program type is selected in the PTY SEEK mode (see page 53). EON Selects a program type (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT) for automatic tuning (see page 54). English 7 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ■ Controlling the TUNER functions ■ Using the remote control Set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. 4 Numeric buttons Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations. 7 BAND Switches the reception band between FM and AM. VOLUME 8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i Press j / i to select a preset station group (A to E) and u / d to select a preset station number (1 to 8) (see page 50). STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE VIDEO SILENT CINEMA 30 30 L AUDIO R Approximately 6 m Note CODE SET POWER TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD The printed letters “DAB MEMORY” and “SRCH MODE” are not applicable to this unit. SLEEP MULTI CH IN CBL DVD TUNER DTV DOCK USB V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME AMP SOURCE TV TV MUTE STEREO TV INPUT MUTE MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 ENT. 10 EFFECT PRESET/CH SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND ENTER A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN REC AUDIO PC/MCX NET RADIO FREQ/TEXT MODE USB PTY SEEK START EON Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places 8 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display t 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 DOCK VIRTUAL STANDARD SP SILENT CINEMA NIGHT AB C B VOLUME AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY HiFi DSP PTY HOLD PS PTY RT CT EON SLEEP dB MUTE 96/24 LFE ft q DIGITAL q PL x q PL A pDVR pV-AUX pDTV/CBL pDVD pMD/CD-R pTUNER pCD pNET USB 96 24 MATRIX DISCRETE ENHANCER q EX 4 q PL mS dB PCM D E F G H I J 1 Decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the decoders of this unit functions. 2 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on (see page 37). 3 Sound field indicators Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Surround left DSP sound field Surround right DSP sound field Surround back DSP sound field L C R SL SB SR K L M P INTRODUCTION 1 N O (Europe model only) 6 DOCK indicator Lights up when you station your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 22). 7 SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 34). 8 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 58). 9 AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode (see page 46). 4 VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 44). 0 TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station (see page 46). 5 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. A STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit. B MEMORY indicator Flashes to show that a station can be stored (see page 48). English 9 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS C VOLUME level indicator Indicates the current volume level. D PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. E STANDARD indicator Lights up when the “SUR. STANDARD” or “SUR. ENHANCED” program is selected. F SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. G Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. H NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see page 34). I HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 59). J Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. K SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 35). L MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 34). M 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. N Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. O LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. P Radio Data System indicators (Europe model only) The corresponding indicator lights up to show the type of the Radio Data System information. EON Lights up when the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 10 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 5 MULTI CH INPUT OUTPUT CENTER 6 DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R DIGITAL INPUT MD/CD-R DVD DTV/CBL 7 8 DOCK LAN DVD Y IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) CD FRONT SURROUND SUB WOOFER SUB WOOFER OPTICAL OPTICAL 9 INTRODUCTION 1 COAXIAL PB PR Y PB PR DVR DVD DTV/ CBL DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT VIDEO TUNER AM ANT GND MONITOR OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT S VIDEO MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO SPEAKERS FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND FRONT A B CENTER 0 A 1 Video component jacks See pages 18 and 19 for connection information. 2 Audio component jacks See page 21 for connection information. 3 MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 24 for connection information. 4 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack See page 13 for connection information. 5 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack See page 21 for connection information. 6 DIGITAL INPUT jacks See pages 19 and 21 for connection information. SURROUND BACK B 8 LAN port Use to connect a network cable for network connections. See page 23 for connection information. 9 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks See pages 18 and 19 for connection information. 0 Antenna terminals See page 25 for connection information. A Speaker terminals See page 13 for connection information. B AC OUTLET(S) Use to supply power to your other audiovisual components. See page 26 for details. 7 DOCK terminal Use to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) where your iPod can be stationed. See page 22 for connection information. English 11 En CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R* speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio sources. * ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). FL Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Place the center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. FR C 30˚ SL SR Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. 60˚ SL 80˚ SR SB FR SW FL SR C SL SB 1.8 m (6 ft) 12 En Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Surround back speaker (SB) The surround back speaker supplements the surround speakers and provides more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place this speaker directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION Note A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. PREPARATION • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 28). • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. • If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see page 27). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 82). Front speakers (A) Right Left Surround speakers Right Left 1 2 4 5 Subwoofer 7 OUTPUT SUB WOOFER SPEAKERS FRONT SURROUND A B CENTER Front speakers (B) SURROUND BACK 3 6 Center speaker English Surround back speaker 13 En CONNECTIONS FRONT terminals Connect one or two sets of front speakers (1, 2) to these terminals. If you use only one front speaker system, connect it to the FRONT A or B terminal. CENTER terminals Connect a center speaker (3) to these terminals. SURROUND terminals Connect surround speakers (4, 5) to these terminals. SURROUND BACK terminals Connect a surround back speaker (6) to these terminals. SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (7) (such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System) to this jack. 14 En 1 7 2 4 3 5 Speaker layout 6 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting the speaker cable ■ Connecting the banana plug (except Europe model) 1 The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector widely used to terminate speaker cables. Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. Banana plug 10 mm 2 PREPARATION 1 Tighten the knob. Loosen the knob. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 2 3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side of each terminal. 4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. English 15 En CONNECTIONS Information on jacks and cable plugs Audio jacks and cable plugs DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO L R COAXIAL OPTICAL (White) (Red) (Orange) L R C AUDIO Left and right Coaxial analog audio digital audio cable plugs cable plug Video jacks and cable plugs VIDEO S VIDEO (Yellow) O V S Optical digital audio cable plug Composite video cable plug S-video cable plug COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR (Green) (Blue) (Red) Y PB PR Component video cable plugs ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. Notes • You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. • Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. 16 En S VIDEO jacks For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate wires of S-video cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. y When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 78), the video signals input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks are converted and output at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks interchangeably. CONNECTIONS Audio and video signal flow ■ Audio signal flow for AUDIO OUT (REC) Input Output AUDIO OUT (REC) DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL Digital audio L R L R Analog audio AUDIO PREPARATION DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL Digital output Analog output Note This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus, audio signals input at the analog jacks are output only at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise, audio signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are output only at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. ■ Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT Input Y PB Output (MONITOR OUT) PR Y PB PR COMPONENT VIDEO Analog video S VIDEO VIDEO Through Video conversion when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 78) Note 17 En English If video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks simultaneously when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON”, the priority order of the input signals is as follows: COMPONENT VIDEO > S VIDEO > VIDEO CONNECTIONS Connecting a TV Connect your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Y VIDEO MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT S VIDEO V COMPONENT VIDEO S Y PB PR S-video in Component video in Video in TV 18 En PB PR CONNECTIONS Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB Connect your DVD player, DVD recorder, VCR or STB (set-top box) using the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 18). The cable TV receiver and the satellite receiver are examples of the STB. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Notes PREPARATION • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 78), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 18). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to the VIDEO jacks. • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 78), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 74). • If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. ■ Connecting a DVD player DVD player S O AUDIO C Coaxial audio out V Optical audio out L S-video out R Component video out Video out Audio out Y PR PB DIGITAL INPUT DVD DVD OPTICAL COAXIAL Y PB PR DVD DVD DVD VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO English 19 En CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting a DVD recorder or a VCR AUDIO Y PB PR DVR DVR OUT IN COMPONENT VIDEO L V V S S-video in R S-video out L Video out Audio in Audio out R DVR OUT S VIDEO Video in IN VIDEO S Y PB PR Component video out DVD recorder or VCR ■ Connecting an STB Cable TV receiver or satellite receiver S O AUDIO Optical audio out V S-video out L Video out R Audio out Component video out Y PB PR DIGITAL INPUT DTV/CBL Y PB PR OPTICAL DTV/ CBL DTV/CBL VIDEO 20 En DTV/CBL S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO CONNECTIONS Connecting a CD player, an MD player or a tape deck Connect your CD player, MD player or tape deck via analog and/or digital connections. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Note CD player Audio out L AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R MD/ OUT OPTICAL (PLAY) CD-R (REC) O Audio out R L R L Audio in Optical audio in IN CD DIGITAL INPUT MD/CD-R OPTICAL O Optical audio out R PREPARATION To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 74). MD recorder or tape deck English 21 En CONNECTIONS Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. Connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. Once the connection is complete, station your iPod in the YAMAHA iPod universal dock. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • You need a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) and its dedicated cable compatible with the DOCK terminal of this unit. • Do not connect any iPod accessories (such as headphones, a wired remote control, or an FM transmitter) to your iPod when it is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately). • Once your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, this unit begins the signal transmission with your iPod. • Unless your iPod is firmly stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, audio and/or video signals may not be output properly. • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK indicator lights up in the front panel display. If the connection between your iPod and this unit fails, a status message appears in the front panel display. For a complete list of connection status messages, see the iPod section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 100. • Only analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. • Depending on the type of iPod, you may need to insert one of the iPod adapters supplied with a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) into the dock slot before you station your iPod. iPod YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) DOCK 22 En CONNECTIONS Connecting the network To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the LAN port of this unit, and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server function. The following diagram shows a connection example where this unit is connected to one of the LAN ports on a 4-port router. To enjoy music files saved on your PC and YAMAHA MCX-2000 or access the Internet radio, each device must be connected properly in the network. Note If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings manually (see page 76). YAMAHA MCX-C15 Internet WAN YAMAHA MCX-A10 (with optional speakers) PC PREPARATION YAMAHA MCX-2000 LAN Modem Router Network cable LAN English 23 En CONNECTIONS Connecting a multi-format player, an external decoder or a sound processor This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right output jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Connecting a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player to this unit. CAUTION Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. Note The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal takes priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. VOLUME Notes STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STRAIGHT l L R SUB WOOFER Multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor 24 En MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L VIDEO AUX USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT BASS/TREBLE TONE CONTROL VIDEO SILENT CINEMA VIDEO AUX VIDEO L L AUDIO R R Game console, video camera or portable audio player Center out R SURROUND Subwoofer out Front out L Surround out FRONT MEMORY LEVEL h PROGRAM INPUT MODE Video out CENTER l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT INPUT SPEAKERS A B V MULTI CH INPUT A/B/C/D/E EDIT PHONES Audio out • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, only the signals input at the FRONT L/R jacks are output at the PHONES jack. L AUDIO R CONNECTIONS Connecting the FM and AM antennas Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. 2 Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT terminal. 3 Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT terminal. 4 Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal back into place. 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the other lead wire to the GND terminal. Notes AM loop antenna (supplied) PREPARATION • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. Indoor FM antenna (supplied) TUNER AM ANT GND FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. Outdoor AM antenna Use a 5 to 10 m of vinyl-covered wire extended from a window. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna y 1 Set up the AM loop antenna. Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to this unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception when you tune into AM stations. English 25 En CONNECTIONS Connecting the power cable Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet. (Canada model) AC OUTLETS To the AC wall outlet ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) Australia model ..................................................... 1 outlet Other models .........................................................2 outlets Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected components. Connect the power cable of your other components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is set to the standby mode. For information on the maximum power or the total power consumption of the components that can be connected to these outlet(s), see “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 106. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the power supply is cut off for more than one week. 26 En CONNECTIONS Setting the speaker impedance CAUTION 3 If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers. Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel to select “SP IMP.”. The following display appears in the front panel display. l PROGRAM h 2,5 PREPARATION VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM NEXT EDIT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L SP IMP.-8 MIN INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE VIDEO SILENT CINEMA 2,4 1 2 L AUDIO R 4 3 Make sure this unit is set to the standby mode. See page 28 for details about turning on this unit or setting it to the standby mode. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”. The following display appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT EFFECT Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and then press STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. While holding down 5 STRAIGHT STANDBY /ON EFFECT SP IMP.-6 MIN Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to save the new setting and set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY /ON Note The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit. English 27 En CONNECTIONS Turning on and off the power When all connections are complete, turn on this unit. STANDBY/ON CODE SET STANDBY TRANSMIT VOLUME POWER POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY /ON POWER POWER MD PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT l PROGRAM LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM DVD AUTO/MAN'L DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME DOCK h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE SLEEP MULTI CH IN CBL TUNING MODE INPUT PHONES STANDBY USB USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE VIDEO SILENT CINEMA L AUDIO AMP R SOURCE TV ■ Turning on this unit ■ Setting this unit to the standby mode Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or POWER on the remote control) to turn on this unit. Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY POWER STANDBY /ON Front panel 28 En or STANDBY /ON Remote control Front panel or Remote control BASIC SETUP BASIC SETUP The “BASIC SETUP” feature is a useful way to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort. Notes • Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this unit. • If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU” (see page 69). • Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 69). • Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter. • Press RETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu level. TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD SLEEP DTV 1 4 DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 EFFECT LEVEL NET SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE AMP A/B/C/D/E SOURCE TV CH Press ENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP”. The following display appears in the OSD. ENT. ENTER TV VOL 4 MOVIE 3 EXTD SUR. PRESET/CH TUNER USB DVR ENTERTAIN 2 SELECT MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DOCK V-AUX MUSIC 1 STANDARD PREPARATION STEREO CODE SET POWER VOLUME RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN 2,13 3-12 REC TV ;BASIC SETUP PRESET/CH .ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL ENTER AUDIO A/B/C/D/E p 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP. 5 p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Press u / d to select “ROOM” and then j / i to select the desired setting. AMP SOURCE PRESET/CH ;BASIC SETUP TV ENTER A/B/C/D/E Press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. MENU SRCH MODE 3 p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Press u / d to select “BASIC SETUP”. PRESET/CH []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p SET MENU .;BASICSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO SET MENU p 2 .ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL Select the size of the room where you have installed your speakers. In general, the room sizes are defined as follows: Choices: S, M, L [Canada model] S (small) 16 x 13ft, 200ft2 (4.8 x 4.0m, 20m2) M (medium) 20 x 16ft, 300ft2 (6.3 x 5.0m, 30m2) L (large) 26 x 19ft, 450ft2 (7.9 x 5.8m, 45m2) [Other models] S (small) 3.6 x 2.8m, 10m2 M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0m, 20m2 L (large) 6.3 x 5.0m, 30m2 ENTER A/B/C/D/E English 29 En BASIC SETUP 6 Press d to select “SUBWOOFER” and then j / i to select the desired setting. PRESET/CH 8 Press d to select “SETUP” and then j / i to select the desired setting. PRESET/CH ;BASIC SETUP ENTER A/B/C/D/E ROOM: S >M L .SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL ;BASIC SETUP ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk . SETUP:>OK CANCEL ENTER A/B/C/D/E p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Choices: YES, NONE • Select “YES” if you have a subwoofer in your system. • Select “NONE” if you do not have a subwoofer in your system. 7 Press d to select “SPEAKERS” and then j / i to select the number of speakers connected to this unit. PRESET/CH Choices: OK, CANCEL • Select “OK” to apply the settings you made. • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the setup procedure without making any changes. y You can also press SET MENU to cancel the setup procedure. 9 Press ENTER to confirm your selection. PRESET/CH ;BASIC SETUP ENTER A/B/C/D/E p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES .SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL ENTER A/B/C/D/E p Choice Display 2spk L C R SL SB SR 30 En 3spk L C R SL SB SR 4spk L C R SL SB SR p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Speakers If you selected “OK” in step 8, each speaker outputs a test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:Test Tone” appears in the OSD for a few seconds and then “CHECK OK?” appears in the OSD. Front L/R Front L/R, Center ;BASIC SETUP ;BASIC SETUP ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL .CHECK:Test Tone ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL .CHECK OK?;;;;YES [<]/[>]:Select [<]/[>]:Select Front L/R, Surround L/R y 5spk L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R 6spk L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back Check the speaker connections (see page 13) and adjust the “SPEAKERS” settings back in step 7, if necessary. BASIC SETUP 10 Press j / i to select the desired setting. 12 ;BASIC SETUP PRESET/CH ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL .CHECK OK?;;;;YES ENTER A/B/C/D/E [<]/[>]:Select PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E • Select “FR” to adjust the balance between the front left and right speakers. • Select “C” to adjust the balance between the front left and center speakers. • Select “SL” to adjust the balance between the front left and surround left speakers. • Select “SB” to adjust the balance between the surround left and surround back speakers. • Select “SR” to adjust the balance between the surround left and surround right speakers. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance between the front left speaker and the subwoofer. Press ENTER to confirm your selection. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E • If you selected “YES” in step 10, the setup procedure is completed and the display returns to the top “SET MENU” display. • If you selected “NO” in step 10, the speaker level adjustment display appears in the front panel display. ;BASIC SETUP -__________+ .FR;;;;;;;;;; C;;;;;;;;;; SL;;;;;;;;;; 13 PREPARATION Choices: YES, NO • Select “YES” to complete the setup procedure if the test tone levels from each speaker were satisfactory. • Select “NO” to proceed to the speaker level adjustment menu in step 12 to balance the output level of each speaker. 11 Press u / d to select a speaker and then j / i to adjust the balance. The selected speaker and the front left speaker (or the surround left speaker) output a test tone in turn. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. Press SET MENU to exit from “BASIC SETUP”. SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE English 31 En PLAYBACK PLAYBACK CAUTION Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. 3 VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM NEXT EDIT TUNING MODE Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired input source. AUTO/MAN'L INPUT PHONES l STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE MD INPUT SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO CD CD-R 6 6 7 DVD 5 3 DTV DOCK CODE SET STEREO TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY CD 3 2 MUSIC ENTERTAIN MULTI CH IN CBL 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 TUNER 2 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 V-AUX USB DVR 7 Front panel EFFECT SET MENU TITLE NET MENU SRCH MODE BAND VOLUME TV Remote control Available input sources A/B/C/D/E SOURCE TV CH NET ENTER AMP TV VOL DVR The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display and in the OSD for a few seconds. ENT. 10 PRESET/CH LEVEL DOCK MOVIE 1 STANDARD SLEEP CD-R DTV MUTE POWER MD DVD TV INPUT TUNER USB V-AUX TV MUTE MULTI CH IN CBL or 2 SLEEP R 5 RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME SP A DVD 1 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press SPEAKERS on the remote control repeatedly) to turn on the set of front speakers you want to use. Each time you press SPEAKERS A or B, the respective set of front speakers are turned on or off. SPEAKERS A B Front panel or AMP SPEAKERS SOURCE 9 TV Remote control 32 En Currently selected input source dB AUTO L R Currently selected input mode Notes • To enjoy multi-channel sources in surround, connect the source component via digital connection and set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS” (see page 35). • See pages 42 for details about surround sound. 4 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 46 for details about tuning instructions. PLAYBACK 5 Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. VOLUME or VOLUME 7 Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel (or press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control) repeatedly to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. See page 58 for details about sound field programs. l 6 PROGRAM h Remote control Front panel Front panel Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select “TREBLE” or “BASS” and then press BASS/TREBLE +/– repeatedly to adjust the corresponding frequency response level. l STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 MOVIE 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 BASIC OPERATION TONE CONTROL or h PROGRAM ENT. 10 EFFECT Remote control NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME SP A TREBLE dB 0dB L NET USB R • Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. • When “TONE BYPASS” is set to “AUTO” (see page 73), and “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB, audio output automatically bypasses the tone control circuitry of this unit. • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the front speakers may not match that of the other speakers. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode (see page 39) is selected or when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME SP A TV Sports • Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency response. • Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency response. Notes DVR dB L R Currently selected sound field program Notes • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound field programs are applied. • To display information about the currently selected input source in the OSD, see page 40 for details. English 33 En USING AUDIO FEATURES USING AUDIO FEATURES Using SILENT CINEMA SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to a source with a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 58). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. Selecting the night listening mode The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on the type of material you are playing. 1 Notes • SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). • SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the “DIRECT STEREO” (see page 39), “2ch Stereo” (see page 39) or “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 39) is selected. AMP NIGHT SOURCE Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF • Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature. Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the audio output. y MUTE • You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume the audio output. • You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTING TYPE” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 73). • The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. Note If you change the input source or the sound field program with the remote control while the audio output is being muted, this unit resumes the audio output. 10 TV Muting the audio output y Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”. When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display. 2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front panel display. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID Choices: MIN, MID, MAX • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. 34 En USING AUDIO FEATURES y AUTO “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored independently. Notes DTS • You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases: – when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode (see page 39) is selected. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. • The effectiveness of the night listening modes may vary depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. ANALOG Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals (2) Analog signals Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no sound is output. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. Note When “INPUT MODE” is set to “AUTO”, this unit automatically switches to the appropriate decoder if a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is detected. Using the sleep timer Selecting the input mode This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the following to select the type of input signals you want to use. • We recommend setting “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default input mode of this unit by using the “INPUT MODE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” (see page 75). 1 Notes • To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, be sure to set “INPUT MODE” to “DTS”. • DTS decoding may not be performed correctly depending on the player even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. Press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the desired input source. MD CD DTV DOCK 1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel to select the desired input source. 2 V-AUX 2 INPUT SLEEP CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL DVD BASIC OPERATION y Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to AC OUTLET(S) (see page 26). TUNER USB DVR NET Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 46 for details about tuning instructions. Press INPUT MODE on the front panel repeatedly to select the desired input mode. INPUT MODE Available input sources NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME SP A Currently selected input source dB AUTO L R English DVD Currently selected input mode 35 En USING AUDIO FEATURES 3 Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP Adjusting the speaker level You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Note This operation will override the level adjustments made in “BASIC SETUP” (see page 29) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see page 71). SLEEP 120min SLEEP 90min AMP SOURCE TV VOL SLEEP OFF SLEEP 30min SLEEP TV CH VOLUME 1 TV 60min The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 MOVIE ENT. EFFECT 1 PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE BAND ENTER 3 A/B/C/D/E NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R SP A TUNER pCD VOLUME DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN REC dB L V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD TUNER pCD MD/CD-R SP A 1 VOLUME SLEEP STRAIGHT 2 DISC SKIP R Flashes DVR DISPLAY AUDIO SLEEP SLEEP 120min NET USB RETURN Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press LEVEL on the remote control repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. dB L R AMP Lights up SOURCE LEVEL TV BAND TITLE 4 To cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. SLEEP NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER pCD VOLUME SP A SLEEP OFF dB L R The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF” disappears from the front panel display after a few seconds. y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit to the standby mode. 36 En • Select “FRONT L” to adjust the front left speaker output level. • Select “CENTER” to adjust the center speaker output level. • Select “FRONT R” to adjust the front right speaker output level. • Select “SUR. R” to adjust the surround right speaker output level. • Select “SUR. B” to adjust the surround back speaker output level. • Select “SUR. L” to adjust the surround left speaker output level. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the subwoofer output level. y Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can also select the speaker by pressing u / d. USING AUDIO FEATURES 2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the speaker output level. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E y This operation can also be performed using the control buttons on the front panel. Press NEXT on the front panel repeatedly to select the speaker channel whose output level you want to adjust and then press LEVEL +/– on the front panel to adjust the output level. Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is resampled to lower the bitrate and to remove sounds that are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass is compensated, providing the improved performance of the overall sound system. Notes BASIC OPERATION • The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is compatible with the PCM signals (48 kHz), the analog 2-channel input sources and the music data input at the USB port or the LAN port. • The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with any of the sound field programs. • When the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on while an incompatible input source is being played back, “Not Available” appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. • When the input source is changed to an incompatible input source while the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on, the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is automatically turned off and the incompatible input source is played back in 2-channel or 6-channel stereo. y The ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display when one of the Compressed Music Enhancer modes is selected. English 37 En USING AUDIO FEATURES 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press ENHANCER on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired Compressed Music Enhancer mode. The following display appears in the OSD and the ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display. AMP ENHANCER SOURCE 0 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 24) as the input source. Press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel display. TV MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH IN or MUSIC ENHANCER . Front panel 2ch Enhancer LOW >HIGH ENHANCER Lights up Choices: 2ch Enhancer, 6ch Enhancer, Off (previously selected sound field program) • Select “2ch Enhancer” to play back compression artifacts in 2-channel stereo. • Select “6ch Enhancer” to play back compression artifacts in 6-channel stereo. • Select Off (previously selected sound field program) to turn off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode. y You can also switch between “2ch Enhancer” and “6ch Enhancer” by pressing j / i on the remote control when the arrow is located on the left of “2ch Enhancer” or “6ch Enhancer” in the OSD. 2 Press d once and then j / i on the remote control to select the desired effect level. PRESET/CH MUSIC ENHANCER . ENTER 2ch Enhancer LOW >HIGH A/B/C/D/E Choices: HIGH, LOW • Select “HIGH” for a high effect level. • Select “LOW” for a low effect level. Note Set the effect level to “HIGH” or “LOW” according to the characteristics of a source. The high-frequency signals of some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”. 38 En Remote control MULTI CH INPUT Note When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display, no other source can be played. To select another input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” disappears from the front panel display. USING AUDIO FEATURES Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STEREO on the remote control repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”. Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound The “DIRECT STEREO” mode allows sources to bypass the decoders and DSP processors of this unit so that you can enjoy pure hi-fi sound from 2-channel PCM and analog sources. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press DIRECT ST. on the remote control to select “DIRECT STEREO”. AMP STEREO AMP SOURCE 1 DIRECT ST. SOURCE TV 8 TV 2ch Stereo DIRECT STEREO • You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 70). • You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly. Enjoying unprocessed input sources When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STRAIGHT on the remote control to select “STRAIGHT”. Notes • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play CDs encoded in DTS when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode is selected. • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog input. When “DTS” is selected as the input mode (see page 35), no sound will be output. • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • “TONE CONTROL” (see page 33) and “SOUND MENU” (see page 69) settings (except for speaker level settings) are not effective. • The front panel display automatically dims. BASIC OPERATION y y You can also select the “DIRECT STEREO” mode by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly. AMP STRAIGHT SOURCE ENT. TV EFFECT STRAIGHT 2 English To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press STRAIGHT on the remote control again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. The sound effect is turned back on. y You can also select the “STRAIGHT” mode by pressing STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel. 39 En USING VIDEO FEATURES USING VIDEO FEATURES Signal format FORMAT Signal format display. When this unit cannot detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to analog input. Display status: Analog, Digital, DolbyD, DTS, MP3, PCM, WMA, --- Displaying the input source information You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. 1 Note Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press SET MENU on the remote control. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. “---” appears when this unit cannot detect any signals. Sampling frequency SAMPLING The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. Display status: 8kHz, 11kHz, 12kHz, 16kHz, 22.05kHz, 24kHz, 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 64kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz, --- AMP SET MENU SOURCE MENU SRCH MODE TV Note “---” appears when this unit cannot detect the sampling frequency. SET MENU .;BASICSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO Channel CHANNEL The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. 2 p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Note Press d repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO” and then press ENTER. The following information about the input source appears in the OSD. PRESET/CH “---” appears when there is no source channel available. Bit rate BITRATE The number of bits passing a given point per second. PRESET/CH Note “---” appears when this unit cannot detect the bit rate. ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E ;SIGNAL INFO FORMAT PCM SAMPLING 48kHz CHANNEL 2/0/--BITRATE --FLAG NONE [RETURN]:Exit Flag FLAG Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. A/B/C/D/E 3 Press SET MENU on the remote control again to exit from “SET MENU”. SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE 40 En USING VIDEO FEATURES Selecting the OSD mode You can display the operating information of this unit on a video monitor. If you display the “SET MENU” and sound field program parameter settings on a video monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is to read the information in the front panel display. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press DISPLAY on the remote control repeatedly to toggle between the OSD modes. The OSD mode changes in the following order. AMP SOURCE ON SCREEN TV Full display You can display a gray background in the OSD when there is not video signal being input by setting “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” to “AUTO” (see page 79). Notes • The OSD signal is not output at the DVR OUT jacks and will not be recorded. • You must set “VIDEO CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON” (see page 78) to display the OSD. • To display the OSD with the component video signals output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, set the OSD mode to the full display mode. • When “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “OFF” (see page 79), the OSD may not be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the picture. Playing video sources in the background You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Press the input selector buttons on the remote control to select a video source and then an audio source. SLEEP MD Short display CD CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL DVD Display off Full display Fully shows the sound field program parameter settings as well as the contents of the front panel display. Short display Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit. DTV DOCK V-AUX BASIC OPERATION DISPLAY y TUNER USB DVR Audio sources NET Video sources y If you want to enjoy an audio source input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38). Display off No information is displayed except for the “SET MENU” screen. P02 MUSIC . Pop/Rock DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;21ms P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;25ms S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 Full display P02 MUSIC Pop/Rock Short display English 41 En ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Enjoying multi-channel sources in 6.1-channel surround If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature to enjoy 6.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders. 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press EXTD SUR. on the remote control repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1-channel playback. Decoders You can select from the following decoders depending on the format of the source you are playing. Decoder Functions Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals PLIIxMusic in 6.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. EX/ES Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder. EX Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. AMP EXTD SUR. SOURCE 7 TV Off OFF Decoders are not used to create 6.1 channels. Notes 2 Press j / i repeatedly to select a decoder while “PLIIxMusic” (etc.) is displayed. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E Auto AUTO When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back the signal in 6.1 channels. If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1 channels. 42 En • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing these kinds of discs in 6.1 channels, select a decoder manually from “PLIIxMusic”, “EX/ES” or “EX”. • 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press EXTD SUR. in the following cases: – when “CENTER SP” (see page 70), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 70) or “SUR. B SP” (see page 70) is set to “NONE”. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is being played. – when the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel signals. – when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – when the “2ch Stereo” (see page 39) or “DIRECT STEREO” (see page 39) mode is selected. • When this unit is set to the standby mode, this setting will be reset to “AUTO”. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 70). ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multi-channels. 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control repeatedly to switch between the “SUR. STANDARD” and “SUR. ENHANCED” programs or press MOVIE to select the “MOVIE THEATER” program. SUR. STANDARD Functions PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie sources PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music sources PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game sources PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie sources PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game sources Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music sources STANDARD 5 AMP SOURCE or TV MOVIE 2 Press SELECT on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired decoder. SUR. ENHANCED or MOVIE THEATER Functions BASIC OPERATION 4 SELECT PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie sources y PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie sources You can also select a decoder by pressing j / i on the remote control while the decoder type is displayed in the front panel display. Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources 6 You can select from the following modes depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. Note The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 70). English 43 En ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Using Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. If you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 70), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 58). Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 70) in the following cases: – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. – when the “DIRECT STEREO” (see page 39), “2ch Stereo” (see page 39) or “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 39) is selected. 44 En RECORDING RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. CAUTION The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. Notes BASIC OPERATION • When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 33), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 71) and the sound field programs (see page 58) do not affect the recorded material. • The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals. • A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. • The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 1 Turn on all the connected components. 2 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the source component you want to record from. VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM NEXT EDIT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R MD 2 SLEEP INPUT CD CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL or CODE SET POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER MD CD 2 V-AUX CD-R DTV TUNER USB DVR NET SLEEP Front panel MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DOCK DTV DOCK TRANSMIT POWER DVD Remote control TUNER USB V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME AMP SOURCE Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. 4 Start recording on the recording component. 45 En English 3 TV FM/AM TUNING FM/AM TUNING There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. Note Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception. Automatic tuning 3 Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE 2 AUTO/MAN'L VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE NET USB USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL VIDEO L AUDIO DVR R 1 4 DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD VOLUME AUTO TUNED A 3 V-AUX SP A BASS/TREBLE SILENT CINEMA 1 3 dB AM 1440 kHz No colon (:) L R Lights up If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. INPUT PRESET/TUNING EDIT Front panel 2 4 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM FM or AM Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. • Press h to tune into a higher frequency. • Press l to tune into a lower frequency. l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD AUTO TUNED VOLUME SP A A dB AM 1530 kHz Lights up 46 En L R FM/AM TUNING Manual tuning 3 If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. TUNING MODE Note DISPLAY AUTO/MAN'L Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. NET USB 2 DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD TUNED VOLUME SP A A dB AM 1440 kHz L R VOLUME No colon (:) STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING MODE LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE VIDEO SILENT CINEMA 4 AUDIO R 1 3 PRESET/TUNING EDIT 1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. INPUT 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue searching. BASIC OPERATION 3 L l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL Front panel 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM FM or AM English 47 En FM/AM TUNING Automatic preset tuning 3 You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. 2 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. 3 MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM VOLUME Flash STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L NET USB INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB TONE CONTROL V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER AUTO TUNED CD MEMORY VOLUME dB BASS/TREBLE VIDEO SILENT CINEMA L AUDIO A1:FM 87.50MHz R 1 1 DVR SP A MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT L R Flashes Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. y INPUT You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower frequencies. For details, see “Automatic preset tuning options” on page 49. Front panel 2 Notes Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception band. “FM” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM FM 48 En • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for all the available stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on page 49. FM/AM TUNING ■ Automatic preset tuning options You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower frequencies. Note Manual preset tuning You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) manually. First carry out steps 1 through 3 in “Automatic preset tuning” on page 48. 3 4 2,5 • Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset station number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning stops when stations have all been stored up to E8. VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B l h PROGRAM VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT BASS/TREBLE TONE CONTROL SILENT CINEMA A/B/C/D/E NEXT VIDEO L AUDIO R l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL 1 Tune into a station automatically or manually. See pages 46 and 47 for tuning instructions. NET USB DVR l PRESET/TUNING h EDIT LEVEL DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD VOLUME TUNED A PRESET/TUNING V-AUX SP A dB AM 630 kHz L R When this unit is tuned into a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. 2 BASIC OPERATION • Press PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel display and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. MEMORY MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM Flashes 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset station group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E NEXT Flashes NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD MEMORY VOLUME SP A C :AM dB 630 kHz L R English Preset station Colon (:) group 49 En FM/AM TUNING 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. • Press h to select a higher preset station number. • Press l to select a lower preset station number. Selecting preset stations You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it was stored. 1 2 l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL VOLUME Flashes STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L INPUT CD MEMORY l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT EDIT NET USB VOLUME PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B l h PROGRAM VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT SP A TONE CONTROL dB BASS/TREBLE SILENT CINEMA C3:AM 630 kHz L VIDEO L AUDIO R R Preset station number STEREO 5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator disappears from the front panel display. DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD TUNED VOLUME SP A C3:AM dB 630 kHz L R The displayed station has been stored as C3. 6 4 DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE 1 ENTER A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN 2 REC 1 V-AUX MOVIE 3 EXTD SUR. When performing this operation with the remote control, set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. MAN'L/AUTO FM DVR ENTERTAIN 2 SELECT y MEMORY NET USB MUSIC 1 STANDARD Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or A/B/C/D/E on the remote control) to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other stations. PRESET/CH A/B/C/D/E Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. 50 En or NEXT Front panel ENTER A/B/C/D/E Remote control FM/AM TUNING 2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band and frequency. Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”. 2,4 1,3 PRESET/CH VOLUME STANDBY /ON l PRESET/TUNING h or PRESET/TUNING ENTER FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM NEXT EDIT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L INPUT LEVEL PHONES A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE SILENT CINEMA DVR VIDEO L AUDIO R Remote control Front panel NET USB USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting preset stations” on page 50. 2 Press and hold EDIT for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. CD TUNED VOLUME SP A E1:FM 87.50MHz dB L R BASIC OPERATION 1 PRESET/TUNING EDIT Flashes NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD MEMORY VOLUME SP A E1:FM 87.50MHz dB L R Flashes English 51 En FM/AM TUNING 3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. See “Selecting preset stations” on page 50. A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL Flashes NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD MEMORY VOLUME SP A dB A5:FM 90.60MHz L R Flashes 4 Press EDIT again. “EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. PRESET/TUNING EDIT NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD VOLUME SP A EDIT 52 En dB E1-A5 L R RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY) RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY) Radio Data System (Europe model only) is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The Radio Data System function is carried out among the network stations. This unit can receive various Radio Data System data such as PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), CT (clock time), and EON (enhanced other networks) when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations. Selecting the Radio Data System program Use this feature to select one of the 15 Radio Data System program types and search for all the available preset stations of the selected program type. 9 0 3 Press PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control to select the desired program type. The name of the selected program type appears in the front panel display. PRESET/CH ENT. 10 EFFECT CODE SET TRANSMIT PRESET/CH POWER POWER STANDBY TITLE POWER MENU SRCH MODE BAND TV AV ENTER MD SLEEP MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV V-AUX TUNER A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN REC USB DVR ENTER A/B/C/D/E CD-R DOCK 3 NET AMP 2 AUDIO PC/MCX FREQ/TEXT NET RADIO MODE USB PTY SEEK START BASIC OPERATION 1 CD POP M SET MENU LEVEL Lights up 4 EON SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME Program type TV 1 Press TUNER on the remote control to select “TUNER” as the input source. TUNER 2 Press PTY SEEK MODE on the remote control to set this unit to the PTY SEEK mode. The name of the program type or “NEWS” flashes in the front panel display. NEWS MODE PTY SEEK START Flashes y To cancel the PTY SEEK mode, press PTY SEEK MODE on the remote control again. Descriptions NEWS News AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information SPORT Sports EDUCATE Education DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture SCIENCE Science VARIED Light entertainment POP M Popular music ROCK M Rock music M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music (easylistening) LIGHT M Light classics CLASSICS Serious classics OTHER M Other music English 53 En RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY) 4 Press PTY SEEK START on the remote control to start searching for all the available Radio Data System preset stations. The name of the selected program type flashes and the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel display while this unit is searching for stations. MODE POP M PTY SEEK START Using the Radio Data System station network Use this feature to receive the EON (enhanced other networks) data service of the Radio Data System station network. Once you select one of the 4 Radio Data System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT), this unit automatically searches for all the available preset stations that are scheduled to broadcast the EON data service of the selected program type for a certain duration of time. When the scheduled EON data service starts, this unit automatically switches to the local station broadcasting the EON data service and then switches back to the nationwide station once the EON data service ends. PTY HOLD Notes Flashes Lights up y To stop searching for stations, press PTY SEEK START on the remote control again. • You can use this feature only when the EON data service is available. • The EON indicator lights up in the front panel display only when the EON data service is being received from a Radio Data System station. 9 0 ENT. 10 EFFECT Notes CODE SET POWER TRANSMIT POWER PRESET/CH STANDBY POWER LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND TV AV ENTER • This unit stops searching for stations when a station broadcasting the selected program type is found. • If the station found is not the one you desire, press PTY SEEK START again to resume searching for another station broadcasting the same program type. MD 1 CD SLEEP A/B/C/D/E CD-R RETURN MULTI CH IN CBL DISPLAY DAB MEMORY DVD DTV DOCK TUNER ON SCREEN REC USB V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME AUDIO PC/MCX AMP FREQ/TEXT NET RADIO MODE USB PTY SEEK START EON 3 SOURCE TV 1 Press TUNER on the remote control to select “TUNER” as the input source. TUNER 2 54 En Make sure the EON indicator is lit in the front panel display. If the EON indicator is not lit in the front panel display, select another Radio Data System program so that the EON indicator lights up. RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY) 3 Press EON on the remote control repeatedly to select one of the 4 Radio Data System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO or SPORT). The name of the selected program type appears in the front panel display. NEWS Displaying the Radio Data System information Use this feature to display the 4 types of the Radio Data System information: PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text) and CT (clock time). The corresponding indicators light up in the front panel display. Notes EON Lights up y To cancel the EON feature, press EON on the remote control repeatedly until the name of the program type disappears and “EON OFF” appears in the front panel display. 9 0 BASIC OPERATION • You can select one of the Radio Data System modes only when the corresponding Radio Data System indicator lights up in the front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive all of the Radio Data System data from the station. • You can select only the available Radio Data System modes being offered by the station. • If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and may not be available even when the other Radio Data System modes are available. • In case of poor reception conditions, press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) on the front panel so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. • If the signal strength is weakened by external interference while this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front panel display. • When the “RT” mode is selected, this unit can display the program information by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters are displayed with the “_” (underscore). • If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT WAIT” appears in the front panel display. ENT. 10 EFFECT CODE SET POWER TRANSMIT POWER PRESET/CH STANDBY POWER LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND TV AV ENTER MD 1 CD SLEEP A/B/C/D/E CD-R RETURN MULTI CH IN CBL DISPLAY DAB MEMORY DVD DTV DOCK TUNER ON SCREEN REC USB V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME AUDIO AMP 2 PC/MCX FREQ/TEXT NET RADIO MODE USB PTY SEEK START EON SOURCE TV 1 Press TUNER on the remote control to select “TUNER” as the input source. TUNER English 55 En RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY) 2 Press FREQ/TEXT on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data System display mode. FREQ/TEXT PS PTY RT CT Frequency display • Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “PTY” to display the type of the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “RT” to display the information on the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “CT” to display the current time. 56 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument. Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. Selecting sound field programs • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound field programs are applied. ■ Front panel operations SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Notes ■ Remote control operations AMP AMP SOURCE TV VOL VOLUME TV CH VOLUME TV STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING MODE LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. MOVIE INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B l STRAIGHT PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT Sound field program selector buttons EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 R 10 ENT. EFFECT PROGRAM l / h Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control repeatedly. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. 57 En English Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. PRESET/CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field program descriptions This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. y The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” (see page 35) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. Notes • The DSP sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself. ■ For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI” can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel stereo sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc. y Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 57). Remote control button Sound field program Features 1 STEREO 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channels or plays back 2-channel sources as they are. 2 MUSIC Pop/Rock CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates an enthusiastic atmosphere where you can feel as if you are in an actual jazz or rock concert. ENTERTAINMENT TV Sports CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound environment of a large concert hall using the surround sound field to enhance your experience of watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. ENTERTAINMENT Mono Movie CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces monaural video sources (such as old movies) at the optimum reverberation level to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. ENTERTAINMENT Game CINEMA DSP processing. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. 3 58 En Sources MULTI 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Remote control button Sound field program Features MOVIE THEATER Spectacle CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded in Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS, especially large-scale movie productions. MOVIE THEATER Sci-Fi CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films encoded in Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS in a virtual-space sound field employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER Adventure CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films similar to the sound field of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER General CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces sounds from 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films characterized by soft and extensive sound field. SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for the selected decoder. SUR. ENHANCED Enhanced processing for the selected decoder. 4 Sources MULTI 2-CH 5 ■ For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. y Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 57). Sound field program Features STEREO 2ch Stereo Plays back 2-channel sources. STEREO 6ch Stereo Plays back 2-channel sources from all speakers in 6.1 channels, providing a larger sound field ideal for background music at parties, etc. MUSIC Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces a classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. MUSIC The Bttm Line HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club where 300 people can be seated. MUSIC The Roxy Thtr HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the dynamic rock music environment of “The Roxy Theatre”, one of the hottest rock clubs in L.A. The listener’s imaginary seat is at the center-left of the hall. ENTERTAINMENT Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city to create a highly concentrated and energetic sound. SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for the selected decoder. SUR. ENHANCED Enhanced processing for the selected decoder. 2-CH 1 2 3 Sources SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Remote control button MULTI 2-CH 5 English 59 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Changing sound field parameter settings 2 Turn on the video monitor and then press DISPLAY on the remote control. The following display is shown in the OSD. You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory settings. Although you do not have to change the initial factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. DISPLAY ON SCREEN Notes • Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group (see page 80). • When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the sound field parameter name in the OSD. • You cannot change the sound field parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 79). If you want to change the sound field parameter values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. Sound field program category P02 Cursor MUSIC . Pop/Rock DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;21ms P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;25ms S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 Sound field parameters Sound field parameter values y • For details about the function and control range of each sound field parameter, see page 61. • Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field program parameter settings. • The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD. In this case, press u / d to scroll through pages. • If you press and hold j / i to change the sound field parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the front panel display. CODE SET POWER TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. Press one of the sound field program selector buttons repeatedly to select the desired sound field program you want to adjust. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER STANDARD MD SLEEP MULTI CH IN CBL DVD 3 DTV TUNER DVR NET 6 7 8 ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 3 DIRECT ST. 5 SPEAKERS 10 ENT. EFFECT ENT. EFFECT DOCK USB PRESET/CH LEVEL V-AUX 1 TITLE SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE BAND AMP ENTER SOURCE TV VOL TV CH A/B/C/D/E VOLUME TV RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN REC 4 2 AUDIO 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP. 4 Press u / d to select the desired sound field parameter and then j / i to change the selected sound field parameter value. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. PRESET/CH AMP SOURCE TV ENTER A/B/C/D/E 60 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS ■ Sound field parameter descriptions You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. y To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 60 for details. Sound field parameter DSP LEVEL Features DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delays. Changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY) 1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY) Source sound Level Level Early reflections Level INIT.DLY P.INIT.DLY S.INIT.DLY SB INI.DLY Time Time Time Delay Delay Delay SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound source Reflection face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms English 61 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter ROOM SIZE P.ROOM SIZE S.ROOM SIZE SB ROOM SIZE Features Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room sizes. Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room. Control range: 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early reflections Level Level Level Source sound Time Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 LIVENESS S.LIVENESS SB LIVENESS Large value = 2.0 Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room. Control range: 0 to 10 Source sound Time Small reflected sound Small value = 0 62 En Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large reflected sound Large value = 10 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter REV.TIME Features Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s Source sound Reverberation Reverberation Early reflections 60 dB REV.TIME Sound source 60 dB REV.TIME Short reverberation REV.TIME Long reverberation Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment. Control range: 0 to 250 ms SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Level REV.DELAY 60 dB Source sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV.DELAY REV.TIME English 63 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter REV.LEVEL Features Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Level Control range: 0 to 100% Source sound REV. LEVEL Time 2ch Stereo DIRECT 2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources. Choices: AUTO, OFF y • The “AUTO” setting bypasses the decoders and DSP processors only when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 33). • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. • The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the subwoofer in the following cases: – “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 70). – “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 69) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see page 70). 6ch Stereo CT LEVEL SL LEVEL SR LEVEL SB LEVEL 64 En 6-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right and surround back levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 6-channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 to 100% SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter Features PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music PANORAMA Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music DIMENSION Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Choices: OFF, ON Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front) Initial setting: STD (standard) PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music CENTER WIDTH Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) Initial setting: 3 DTS Neo:6 Music C.IMAGE DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. Control range: 0.0 to 1.0 Initial setting: 0.3 y SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS The “PRO LOGIC IIx Music”, “PRO LOGIC II Music”, and “DTS Neo:6 Music” parameters can be set only when “SUR. STANDARD” is selected. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control repeatedly to select “SUR. STANDARD” (see page 43). English 65 En SET MENU SET MENU You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Basic setup BASIC SETUP Use this feature to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort (see page 29). ■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Parameter Features Page A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the crossover frequency. 69 B)SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 71 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 72 D)CENTER GEQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 72 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 72 F)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 73 G)AUDIO SET Adjusts the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings. 73 Input menu 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. Parameter Features Page A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used. 74 B)INPUT MODE Selects the initial input mode of the source. 75 C)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source. 75 D)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 76 66 En SET MENU Network and USB menu 3 NET/USB MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the network and USB system parameters. Parameter Features Page A)NETWORK Configures the network settings automatically or manually. 76 B)PLAY STYLE Adjusts the playback style. 77 C)INFORMATION Displays the network system information. 78 Option menu 4 OPTION MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters. Parameter Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. Sets the OSD display time as well as the front panel display scrolling mode. 78 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings. 79 C)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 80 D)MULTI ZONE SET Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. 80 ■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 40). ADVANCED OPERATION English 67 En SET MENU Using SET MENU 2 Press u / d to select “MANUAL SETUP”. Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. TV AV CD CD-R STEREO MD SLEEP V-AUX MOVIE 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 USB SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT NET 9 0 TUNER DVR ENTER A/B/C/D/E [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p DTV ENTERTAIN SET MENU ;BASICSETUP .;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO p DVD DOCK MUSIC 1 STANDARD MULTI CH IN CBL PRESET/CH ENT. 10 EFFECT 1 AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH PRESET/CH SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND VOLUME TV ENTER A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN 1,7 2-6 3 REC MOVIE Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”. The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the OSD. y ;MANUAL SETUP PRESET/CH ENTER 4 Note You cannot change some “SET MENU” parameters when “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected as the night listening mode (see page 34). Press u / d repeatedly and then press ENTER to select and enter the desired menu. The following displays are examples where “SOUND MENU” is selected. PRESET/CH 1 p A/B/C/D/E .1SOUNDMENU 2INPUTMENU 3NET/USBMENU 4OPTIONMENU []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p • You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is reproducing sound. • If you press one of the sound field program selector buttons during the “SET MENU” operation, the “SET MENU” operation is canceled. • Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each parameter setting. • Press RETURN to return to the previous menu level. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E AMP SET MENU SOURCE MENU 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 1 SOUND MENU 2/2 SRCH MODE TV p 68 En p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter .E)LFE LEVEL F)DYNAMIC RANGE G)AUDIO SET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p SET MENU .;BASICSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO p p .A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)CENTER GEQ []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter SET MENU 5 Press u / d repeatedly and then press ENTER to select and enter the desired submenu. The following display is an example where “SPEAKER LEVEL” is selected. PRESET/CH 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 PRESET/CH ENTER 1 SOUND MENU 2/2 p .E)LFE LEVEL F)DYNAMIC RANGE G)AUDIO SET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p A/B/C/D/E p p ENTER A/B/C/D/E .A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)CENTER GEQ []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings. -__________+ .FL;;;;;;;;;; FR;;;;;;;;;; C;;;;;;;;;; y If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE 6 Press u / d to select the desired parameter and then j / i to change the parameter settings. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. PRESET/CH SMALL>LARGE PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. SET MENU • Select “SMALL” (small) if you have small front speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70). • Select “LARGE” (large) if you have large front speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the front left and right channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. MENU SRCH MODE Note Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the power supply is cut off for more than one week. ADVANCED OPERATION 7 FRONT SP If “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 70), the LFE signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting. English 69 En SET MENU Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG Surround back speakers SUR. B SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG SUR. B SP CENTER SP NONE>SML LRG NONE>SMLLRG • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a center speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. • Select “SML” (small) if you have a small center speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/ BASS OUT”. • Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large center speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All the center channel signals are directed to the center speaker. Surround left/right speakers Choices: NONE, SML, LRG SUR. L/R SP • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a surround back speaker. The surround back channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. • Select “SML” (small) if you have a small surround back speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large surround back speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround back channel signals are directed to the surround back speaker. Bass out LFE/BASS OUT Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH SUR. L/R SP LFE/BASS OUT NONE>SMLLRG SWFRFRNT>BOTH • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 44) and “SUR. B SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. • Select “SML” (small) if you have small surround left and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select “LRG” (large) if you have large surround left and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. 70 En • Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the lowfrequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. • Select “FRNT” (front) if you did not connect a subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the lowfrequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 69). • Select “BOTH” (both) if you connected a subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The lowfrequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 69). SET MENU Crossover CROSSOVER Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 69 and 70). All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 69 and 70). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz ■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left or surround left speakers and each speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 69). Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB Control step: 1.0 dB Initial setting: 0 dB B)SPEAKER LEVEL -__________+ .FL;;;;;;;;;; FR;;;;;;;;;; C;;;;;;;;;; CROSSOVER FREQ;;;80Hz Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE 02ASUBWOOFER PHASE >NORMALREVERSE • Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “FL” to adjust the balance of the front left speaker. • Select “FR” to adjust the balance of the front right speaker. • Select “C” to adjust the balance of the center speaker. • Select “SL” to adjust the balance of the surround left speaker. • Select “SR” to adjust the balance of the surround right speaker. • Select “SB” to adjust the balance of the surround back speaker. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance of the subwoofer. Note “C”, “SL”, “SR”, “SB” and “SWFR” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 70), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 70), “SUR. B SP” (see page 70) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70) are set to “NONE” respectively. ADVANCED OPERATION English 71 En SET MENU ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. ■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band (100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You can make adjustments while listening to the currently selected source component or a test tone. Control range: –6 to +6 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0 dB C)SP DISTANCE D)CENTER GEQ p Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: [Canada model]: feet (ft) [Other models]: meters (m) • Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters. • Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet. y Press u / d to select a frequency band and j / i to adjust the selected frequency band. ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Control range: –20 to 0 dB Control step: 1 dB E)LFE LEVEL .SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust p Note “CENTER”, “SUR.L”, “SUR.R”, “SUR.B” and “SWFR” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 70), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 70), “SUR. B SP” (see page 70) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70) are set to “NONE” respectively. Test tone TEST Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently selected source component. • Select “ON” to output test tones from the front left and center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the center speaker. p Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft) • Select “FRONT L” to adjust the distance of the front left speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “FRONT R” to adjust the distance of the front right speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “CENTER” to adjust the distance of the center speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “SUR. L” to adjust the distance of the surround left speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “SUR. R” to adjust the distance of the surround right speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “SUR. B” to adjust the distance of the surround back speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) • Select “SWFR” to adjust the distance of the subwoofer. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB p .TEST>OFFON -______+ 100Hz ;;;;;; 300Hz ;;;;;; 1kHz ;;;;;; 3kHz ;;;;;; 10kHz ;;;;;; []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust p p . UNIT;;;;;;meters FRONTL;;;;3.00m FRONTR;;;;3.00m CENTER;;;;;3.00m []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Speaker SPEAKER Adjusts the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. 72 En SET MENU ■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. ■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this unit. G)AUDIO SET F)DYNAMIC RANGE p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p .SP:MINSTD>MAX HP:MINSTD>MAX .MUTING TYPE;FULL AUDIO DELAY;;0ms TONE BYPASS;AUTO p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Speaker SP Adjusts the speaker compression. Headphone HP Adjusts the headphone compression. Choices: MIN, STD, MAX • Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select “STD” (standard) for general use. • Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. Muting type MUTING TYPE Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 34). Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio output. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay AUDIO DELAY Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Control range: 0 to 160 ms Control step: 1 ms Tone bypass TONE BYPASS Use this feature to select whether audio output bypasses tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are set to 0 dB (see page 33). Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” if you want signals to bypass tone control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible. • Select “OFF” if you do not want signals to bypass tone control circuitry. ADVANCED OPERATION English 73 En SET MENU 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. 2 INPUTMENU p p .A)I/OASSIGNMENT B)INPUTMODE C)INPUTRENAME D)VOLUME TRIM []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4 OPTICAL IN (2) OPTICAL IN (3) OPTICAL IN (4) Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR (3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR (4) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR OPTICALIN ■ Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C CMPNT-V INPUT [A] CMPNT-V INPUT [B] CMPNT-V INPUT [C] Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR [B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR [C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR CMPNT-VINPUT .[A];;;;;DVD (DVD) [B];;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL) [C];;;;; DVR ( DVR ) For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 OPTICAL OUT (1) Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR OPTICALOUT .(1);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R ) 74 En .(2);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R) (3);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (4);;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL ) For COAXIAL INPUT jack 5 COAXIAL IN (5) Choices: (5) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR COAXIALIN .(5);;;;; ( DVD DVD ) Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. SET MENU ■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE Use this feature to set this unit to reset “INPUT MODE” back to “AUTO” (see page 35) regardless of the previous setting or to recall the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”, or “ANALOG”) used for that source whenever you turn on this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST 2 Press j / i on the remote control to place the “_” (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. PRESET/CH ENTER B)INPUTMODE A/B/C/D/E >AUTOLAST [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return 3 • Select “AUTO” to reset “INPUT MODE” back to “AUTO” (see page 35) regardless of the previous setting whenever you turn on this unit. This unit automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals (2) Analog signals • Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically recall the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”, or “ANALOG”) used for that source whenever you turn on this unit. C)INPUTRENAME Press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the input source you want to change the name of. ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E Notes • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press d to change the character in the following order, or press u to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#, *, +, –, etc.) 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each input source. 5 Press ENTER on the remote control to exit from “INPUT RENAME”. PRESET/CH ENTER ADVANCED OPERATION 1 p p [<]/[>]:Position []/[]:Chara. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display. DVD-> DVD Press u / d to select the character you want to use and then press j / i to move to the next space. A/B/C/D/E MD CD SLEEP CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV DOCK V-AUX TUNER USB DVR NET English 75 En SET MENU 3 NET/USB MENU Use this menu to adjust the network and USB system parameters. 3 NET/USBMENU .A)NETWORK B)PLAY STYLE C)INFORMATION p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p ■ Volume trim D)VOLUME TRIM Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DOCK, DVR, PC/MCX, USB, NET RADIO, MULTI CH IN Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 1.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB D)VOLUME TRIM DVD DVD-> 0.0dB [<]/[>]:Adjust [RETURN]:Exit ■ Network settings A)NETWORK Use this feature to view the network parameters (IP address, etc.) or to change them manually. A)NETWORK p p . DHCP ON IP 192.168.000.002 SUBNET 255.255.255.000 GATEWAY 192.168.000.001 DNS (P) 192.168.000.001 DNS (S) 000.000.000.000 SET >CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Note The above display is an example. DHCP DHCP When this parameter is set to “ON”, network parameters for “IP”, “SUBNET”, “GATEWAY”, “DNS (P)” and “DNS (S)” obtained from a DHCP enabled router are displayed. If DHCP server function is not available, set this parameter to “OFF” to configure the network parameters manually. Choices: ON, OFF IP address IP Use this parameter to specify an IP address assigned to this unit. This value must not duplicate the one used for other devices in the target network. Subnet mask SUBNET Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value assigned to this unit. y For most of the cases, the subnet mask value can be set as “255.255.255.0”. Default gateway GATEWAY Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default gateway. 76 En SET MENU Primary DNS server DNS (P) Secondary DNS server DNS (S) Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers. ■ Playback styles B)PLAY STYLE Use this feature to adjust the playback style according to your preference. You can shuffle songs in a random order or repeat one specific song or a sequence of songs. Note B)PLAY STYLE If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in “DNS (P)”. If you have two or more DNS addresses, enter one of them in “DNS (P)” and another in “DNS (S)”. Note When “DHCP” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other network settings. To specify the other parameters, you need to first set “DHCP” to “OFF”. 2 To specify the parameter, press u / d repeatedly to change the number and press j / i to select the digit to change. 3 Press ENTER to confirm the parameter. 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to configure each network parameter. 5 Select “SET” and then press ENTER to finish configuration. Note In case you have changed your network configuration, you may need to reconfigure the network settings again. You can reset the network settings of this unit to the initial factory settings by using “N-RESET” in the advanced setup menu (see page 82). Repeat REPEAT Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: OFF, SINGLE, ALL • Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature. • Select “SINGLE” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “ALL” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. Notes • When “REPEAT” is set to a setting other than “OFF”, the highlighted letter “R” appears in the top right corner of the playback status screen while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. • If “REPEAT” is set to “SINGLE”, the setting will be reset to “OFF” when this unit is set to the standby mode. Shuffle SHUFFLE Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a random order. Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature. • Select “ON” to set this unit to play songs or albums in a random order. Note When “SHUFFLE” is set to “ON”, the highlighted letter “S” appears in the top right corner of the playback status screen while songs or albums are being shuffled. ADVANCED OPERATION y []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p Press u / d on the remote control repeatedly and then press ENTER to select and enter the desired network parameter. p 1 .REPEAT;;;;;;;OFF SHUFFLE;;;;;;OFF English 77 En SET MENU ■ Network information C)INFORMATION Use this feature to display the network system information. 4 OPTION MENU Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters. C)INFORMATION 4 OPTIONMENU MAC ADDRESS XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX STATUS 10BASE-T FULL-DUPLEX [ENTER]:Return p p Note .A)DISPLAYSET B)MEMORYGUARD C)PARAM.INI D)MULTI ZONESET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET The above display is an example. []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p “NO LINK” appears when network connection is not made. p Note A)DISPLAYSET .ON SCREEN;;;;10s FL SCROLL;;;CONT p Status STATUS This information displays the current link status of the network. Display status: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, FULL-DUPLEX, HALF-DUPLEX, NO LINK A)DISPLAYSET .DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 VIDEOCONV.;;;ON OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0 GRAY BACK;;;AUTO []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p MAC (Media Access Control) address MAC ADDRESS This information displays the MAC address that is assigned to this unit. Dimmer DIMMER Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: – 4 to 0 Control step: 1 • Press j to make the front panel display dimmer. • Press i to make the front panel display brighter. Video conversion VIDEO CONV. Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to convert composite and S-video signals interchangeably and up-convert composite and S-video signals to component video signals. • Select “OFF” not to convert any signals. Notes • The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are converted to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. • You must set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” to display the OSD. • Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”. 78 En SET MENU OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward) Control step: 1 Initial setting: 0 • Press j to raise the position of the OSD. • Press i to lower the position of the OSD. Gray back GRAY BACK Use this feature to display a gray background in the OSD when there is no video signal being input. Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” to display a gray background in the OSD when there is no video signal being input. • Select “OFF” not to display any background in the OSD. Notes Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL Use this feature to set whether to display the information (such as song title or channel name) in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once when “DOCK” or “NET/USB” is selected as the input source. Choices: CONT, ONCE • Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner. • Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once. ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON • Depending on the video signals being input or the system setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to “OFF”. • Even when “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”, the OSD may not be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the picture. On-screen display time ON SCREEN Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the iPod menu or NET/USB menu in the OSD after you perform a certain operation. Choices: ON, 10s, 30s • Select “ON” to display the OSD unceasingly during an operation. • Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. • Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. B)MEMORYGUARD >OFFON [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature. • Select “ON” to protect: – DSP program parameters – all “SET MENU” items – all speaker levels Note When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other “SET MENU” items. ADVANCED OPERATION English 79 En SET MENU ■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI ■ Zone set D)MULTI ZONE SET Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial factory settings. Press the corresponding sound field program selector buttons on the remote control to select the sound field program that you want to initialize. An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field program names that have been changed from their initial factory settings. Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER, STANDARD Use this feature to specify the location of speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals of this unit. C)PARAM.INI STEREO *MUSIC ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE THEATER *STANDARD Press DSP key Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON” (see page 79). 80 En D)MULTI ZONESET .SPB;;;;;;;FRONT [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return Speaker B setting SP B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B • Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main zone. • Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another zone. If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at the SPEAKERS B terminals only. Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the sound is output from both headphones and the SPEAKERS B terminals when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”. • If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 44). ADVANCED SETUP ADVANCED SETUP This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • The settings you make are reflected next time you turn on this unit by pressing STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or POWER on the remote control) (see page 28). • Only STANDBY/ON, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and PROGRAM l / h are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. 3 1-2,5 VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM NEXT EDIT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display. See page 82 for a complete list of available parameters. MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R l 2,4 1 PROGRAM h 3 Currently selected parameter Currently selected parameter setting Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. SP IMP.-8 MIN STANDBY /ON 4 2 While holding down ADVANCED OPERATION Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel, and then press STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. STRAIGHT EFFECT 5 STRAIGHT STANDBY /ON Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to save the new setting and set this unit to the standby mode. EFFECT STANDBY /ON y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. English 81 En ADVANCED SETUP ■ Speaker impedance SP IMP. ■ Network reset N-RESET Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN • Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω . • Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω . Use this feature to reset the network settings of this unit (see page 76) to the initial factory settings. Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any network settings of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the network settings of this unit. SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.* 8ΩMIN Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Surround back If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. Notes • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. • When the network settings are reset, “DHCP” in “NET/USB MENU” is automatically set to “ON” (see page 76) and the registered client ID of this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000 is cleared (see page 92). ■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 86). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library code is set to “00001”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library code is set to “00002”. Note Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. 6ΩMIN Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Surround back * The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems (A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8ΩMIN”. ■ Factory presets PRESET Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings (see page 95). Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit. Notes • This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. 82 En You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library code for the remote control (see page 86). ■ Remote control TUNER ID REMOTE TUN Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 86). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID library code is set to “81916”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID library code is set to “81917”. Note You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library code for the remote control (see page 86). REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 85). Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling a TV Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. Set the component selector switch to TV to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for DTV/CBL or (see page 85). When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and , priority is given to the one set for DTV/CBL. CODE SET TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER MD CD SLEEP CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL DVD TUNER DTV DOCK V-AUX USB CODE SET NET DVR AMP *1 POWER TV AV CD CD-R SOURCE TV VOL TV CH TRANSMIT POWER STANDBY MD VOLUME TV SLEEP MULTI CH IN CBL DVD TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 POWER *1 TUNER DTV DOCK USB V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME AMP SPEAKERS ENHANCER 9 0 NIGHT SOURCE STRAIGHT TV ENT. 10 EFFECT PRESET/CH SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE *2 TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 MOVIE ENTER A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN REC ENT. 10 AUDIO PC/MCX FREQ/TEXT NET RADIO MODE EFFECT PRESET/CH USB PTY SEEK START SET MENU LEVEL EON TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE *2 ENTER A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN REC AUDIO PC/MCX NET RADIO FREQ/TEXT MODE USB PTY SEEK START EON ADVANCED OPERATION Notes *1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the component selector switch position. *2 These buttons control this unit only when the component selector switch is set to AMP. Notes *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the component selector switch position. Remote control TV POWER Turns on or off the power. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV CH +/– Changes the channel number. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. TV INPUT Changes the input source. These buttons control your TV only when the component selector switch is set to TV. For details, see the “Digital TV/ Cable TV” column on page 84. 83 En English *2 Digital TV/Cable TV REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Controlling other components U Set the component selector switch to SOURCE to control other components selected with the input selector buttons, or the blank button on the right of MD/CD-R. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 85). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button, and the blank button on the right of MD/CD-R. Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Remote control DVD player/ recorder 1 CODE SET POWER TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD DTV TUNER DVR NET DOCK USB V-AUX AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME 3 4 5 TV INPUT MUTE MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 LD/CD player MD/CD recorder 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. MOVIE 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 ENT. 10 PRESET/CH SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND 7 8 ENTER A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN 9 REC 6 TV MUTE STEREO Digital TV/ Cable TV ENTERTAIN 2 EFFECT TV VCR U MUSIC 1 MULTI CH IN CBL DVD 2 SLEEP U STEREO Tuner AUDIO PC/MCX NET RADIO FREQ/TEXT MODE USB PTY SEEK START iPod® EON PC/MCX-2000/ Internet radio/ USB 1 2 AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons 3 4 TITLE Title PRESET/CH u Up VCR channel up Up Preset up (1-8) Up Up PRESET/CH d Down VCR channel down Down Preset down (1-8) Down Down A/B/C/D/E j Left Left Preset down (A-E) Previous menu Previous menu Preset up (A-E) Subsequent menu Subsequent menu Subsequent menu Subsequent menu 5 6 7 Band A/B/C/D/E i Right Right ENTER Enter Enter RETURN Return Return REC Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) *3 Rec *3 Rec *2*3 Disc skip (CD player) Bookmark *5 Rec *3 Select PC/MCX p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play Play w Search backward Search backward Search backward *2 Search backward Search backward Search backward *4 Select NET RADIO f Search forward Search forward Search forward *2 Search forward Search forward Search forward *4 Select USB AUDIO Audio Audio Audio *2 Sound (LD player) e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause b Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward *2 Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward *6 a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *6 s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop Stop Enter Chapter/Time (LD player) Index (CD player) Index Previous menu Previous menu Display Display Display Display ENT. Title/Index 8 9 Preset stations (1-8) MENU Menu DISPLAY Display Enter Menu Display Display Notes *1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. These buttons control your VCR or DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 85). *3 When you use this button to record a source, press it twice repeatedly to prevent a malfunction. *4 Press and hold to search backward or forward. *5 Press and hold to store your favorite Internet radio stations with bookmarks (see page 93). *6 These buttons are not operational when the Internet radio is selected as the sub input source of NET/USB. *2 84 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the remote control code 1 You can control your TV and other components by setting the appropriate remote control code for each input source. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. Press one of the input selector buttons, or the blank button on the right of MD/CD-R to select the component you want to set up. MD CD SLEEP CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL DVD The following table shows the default component in the “Library (component category)” column and the remote control code for each input source. DTV DOCK V-AUX TUNER USB DVR NET Remote Control Code Default Settings 2 Input source Library (component category) Manufacturer Default code CD CD YAMAHA 61907 MD/CD-R MD YAMAHA 70888 DVD DVD YAMAHA 40539 DTV/ CBL – – – TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 81916 V-AUX/ DOCK OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES (iPod) YAMAHA 81981 DVR DVR YAMAHA 51544 NET/ USB OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES (NET/USB) YAMAHA – – – TAPE YAMAHA 70524 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET Flashes 3 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter the five-digit remote control code for the component to be used. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the remote control code for the selected component is set. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 MOVIE 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 TRANSMIT 81982 10 Flashes ENT. EFFECT y Note To clear the remote control code previously set for the selected component, enter the code number “9980”. You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above. In this case, try setting other YAMAHA remote control codes. Notes y The blank button is the one on the right of MD/CD-R. ADVANCED OPERATION Blank button • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup procedure. English 85 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Setting remote control TUNER ID library codes Setting library codes You can operate multiple YAMAHA receivers or amplifiers in the same room with the supplied remote control simultaneously. Set the appropriate library code to select and operate the desired component with the supplied remote control. Select one of the following codes to set the remote control TUNER ID library code for the component you want to use. 1 ■ Setting remote control AMP ID library codes Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. TUNER Select one of the following codes to set the remote control AMP ID library code for the component you want to use. 1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. 2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET TRANSMIT CODE SET Flashes Flashes 2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “00001” or “00002”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the AMP ID library code is changed. 3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “81916” or “81917”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the TUNER ID library code is changed. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 9 0 10 ENT. TRANSMIT Flashes Function 00001 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. 00002 *1 *2 To operate this unit using an alternative code. ENT. Flashes EFFECT EFFECT AMP ID library code *1 10 TRANSMIT Remote control AMP ID *2 TUNER ID library code *1 ID1 (initial setting) 81916 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. 81917 ID2 The remote control setting The setting of this unit (see page 82) *1 *2 Function To operate this unit using an alternative code. Remote control TUNER ID *2 ID1 (initial setting) ID2 The remote control setting The setting of this unit (see page 82) Notes Notes • You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 82). • When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. • You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER ID of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 82). • When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. 86 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Resetting all remote control codes Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory settings. 1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET Flashes 2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “9981”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and all the remote control codes previously set are cleared and reset to the initial factory settings. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 MOVIE ENT. TRANSMIT Flashes EFFECT y If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step 2, the clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the clearing procedure. ADVANCED OPERATION English 87 En USING IPOD® USING iPod® Once you have stationed your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 22), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 37). Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. y • For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other components” on page 84. • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 100. Controlling iPod You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode). ■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote mode You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play, stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without the aid of the OSD of this unit. y • You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod. • Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. 88 En ■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse mode You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD of this unit. The name of the song being played appears in the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79). You can also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to suit your personal preferences. Notes • Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod. • The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your iPod. • There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are replaced with underscores “_”. • The “Setup” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the OSD. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between the “Setup” parameter settings. • You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the OSD. Instead, you must use the controls on your iPod to select the desired photos or video clips. USING iPod® 1 Press DISPLAY on the remote control. The following display appears in the OSD. iPod Top Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers Setup DISPLAY ON SCREEN > > > > > > > Shuffle Shuffle Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a random order. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in a random order. • Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in a random order. Note 2 Press u / d / j / i on the remote control to navigate the iPod menu and then press ENTER to begin playback of the selected song. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the highlighted letter “S” appears in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled. Repeat Repeat Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: Off, One, All • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. Note Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums (albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers (composers) • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs • Setup > Shuffle, Repeat When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the highlighted letter “R” appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. ADVANCED OPERATION English 89 En USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES This unit is equipped with network and USB features that allow you to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA files saved on your PC, YAMAHA MCX-2000, USB memory device and USB portable audio player or access the Internet radio. Notes • YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations. • For further details about networking, refer to the operation manuals supplied with your network devices. Also refer to technical reference books, if needed. • Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played. y • For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control the network and USB features, see the “PC/MCX-2000/Internet radio/USB” column in “Controlling other components” on page 84. • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “Network and USB” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 101. Navigating the network and USB menus The following diagram shows the construction of the network and USB menu. NET/USB PC/MusicCAST (MCX-2000) Server* Playlists Selects a song by playlist stored on the server. Refer to the documents of the server for details about the playlist file format, the process of creating the playlist file, etc. Artists Selects a song by artist. In addition, you can select an album within the artist (MCX-2000 only). Albums Selects a song by album. Songs Selects a song directly. Genres Selects a song by genre. In addition, you can select an album within the genre (MCX-2000 only). Recall Play Makes this unit recall play from MCX-2000 or another client. For details, refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000. (MCX-2000 only) Internet Radio USB Bookmarks Selects an Internet radio station that has been added to the “Bookmarks” list (see page 93). Locations Selects an Internet radio station or a Podcast service by location. Genres Selects an Internet radio station or a Podcast service by genre. New Stations Selects an Internet radio station from the ones that have recently started the service. Popular Stations Selects an Internet radio station from the list of popular stations. Podcasts Selects a Podcast service by location or genre. Help Broadcasts voice-assisted guidelines on various topics of the related Internet service. Files/Directories Selects a file by navigating directories. Note * Only the available PC servers and MCX-2000 are displayed. 90 En USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES The following procedure shows the basic steps to navigate the network and USB menus. See pages 92 and 93 for details about each sub input source. 2 Note “Please wait” may appear whenever it takes time for communication. This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a while. 1 Press MENU on the remote control to display the top NET/USB menu. The following display appears in the OSD. If any other display appears in the OSD, press MENU on the remote control repeatedly until the top NET/USB menu appears. NET/USB Set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press NET/USB on the remote control to select “NET/USB” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the NET/USB indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the contents previously played for the corresponding sub input source of NET/USB is automatically played. SET MENU MENU 1/3 3 You can also select the desired sub input source by pressing the corresponding button on the remote control (see page 7). NET TV 4 Lights up DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME SP A PC/MCX Press u / d to select the desired sub input source and then press i or ENTER. y USB pNET USB > > > SRCH MODE AMP SOURCE Top PC/MusicCAST Internet Radio USB dB L R Press u / d / j / i on the remote control to select the desired song or Internet radio station. • Press u / d to select the desired menu. • Press i to enter the selected menu. • Press j to return to the previous menu level. y • “i” in the right corner of each menu line indicates that there is a submenu available in the next menu level. • You can press ENTER or MENU to enter the selected menu or to return to the previous menu level. 5 ADVANCED OPERATION Press ENTER to play the selected song or to listen to the selected station. English 91 En USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES Using a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000 Use this feature to enjoy music files saved on your PC or YAMAHA MCX-2000. MCX-2000 is a music server that enhances the concept of YAMAHA exclusive MusicCAST, a digital music delivery method over a personal network. 1 Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your PC, or register this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000. • Refer to “Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your PC” on page 92 and “Registering this unit on the YAMAHA MCX-2000” on page 93. • This procedure is needed only the first time. 2 Turn on your PC or MCX-2000. The PC server or MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the submenu of PC/MusicCAST. 3 Select a desired PC server or MCX-2000 to begin playback. Notes • YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations. • You can connect this unit to up to 4 PC servers and 1 MCX-2000, and each server must be connected to the same subnet as this unit. • Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files on your PC may not be playable or may be noisy when played. • (MCX-2000 only) Files marked with an asterisk (*) have not been converted to MP3 format. You cannot play back such files immediately unless you set the “Receive PCM Stream” setting of this unit to “ON” on MCX-2000. For details, refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000. y • While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at the bottom of the OSD. • You can use b / a to skip backward/forward and h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD. • You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the “PLAY STYLE” parameters in “NET/USB MENU” (see page 77). • You can set whether to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 characters after scrolling all characters once by using “FL SCROLL” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79). 92 En ■ Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your PC With Windows Media Connect 2.0, you can play back the audio files on your PC. For details refer to the documents of Windows Media Connect 2.0. 1 Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your PC. You can download the installer of Windows Media Connect 2.0 from the Microsoft website. 2 Turn on your PC and then share a folder on the PC. The Shared folder is added to the server list on the submenu of PC/MusicCAST. Notes • Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus software, firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software appropriately. • If you are using a PC with Windows XP Professional, and the PC is logging on to a domain, you may not be able to connect the PC server. In such cases, log on to the local machine instead of the domain. USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES ■ Registering this unit on the YAMAHA MCX-2000 You must register this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000 so that this unit can be recognized by your YAMAHA MCX-2000. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with your YAMAHA MCX-2000. 1 Turn off this unit. Using the Internet radio Use this feature to listen to Internet radio stations. This unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service particularly customized for this unit, providing over 2000 radio station database. Further, you can store your favorite stations with bookmarks. Notes 2 Set your YAMAHA MCX-2000 to the “Auto Config” mode. 3 Turn on this unit. • MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the submenu of PC/MCX. • The client ID of this unit appears in the OSD of your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (shown as CLXXXXX), and this completes the automatic configuration procedure. Notes • The latter part of the client ID of this unit is same as the last 5 digits of the MAC address of this unit. For details about MAC address, see page 78. • To clear the registered client ID of this unit, use the “Manual Config” mode of your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000) and then set “N-RESET” in the advanced setup menu of this unit to “RESET” (see page 82). • The client control functions of MCX-2000 over this unit other than “View Play Info”, “Receive PCM Stream” and “Edit Client title” are not available. Avoid using these functions as it will stop the playback on this unit. • This service may be discontinued without notice. • Some Internet radio stations may not be played even if they are selected in the NET RADIO menu. • To listen to the Internet radio, connect this unit to your network (see page 23). • A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is strongly recommended (i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem, etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP. y • You can use h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD. • “Podcast” is a type of the Internet radio service, and there are a number of Podcast services available on the Internet. The Podcast is not a continuous service. That is, this unit stops playback when an episode of the Podcast ends. • Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access of this unit to Internet radio stations. In such cases, configure the security settings appropriately. ■ Storing your favorite Internet radio stations with bookmarks Use this feature to select your favorite Internet radio stations quickly. y To remove the stored station from the list, select the item in the first level of the “Bookmarks” list and then press and hold TITLE on the remote control. ADVANCED OPERATION Press and hold TITLE on the remote control while the selected Internet radio station service is being broadcast. The stored Internet radio station is added to the “Bookmarks” list (see page 90). English 93 En USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA files saved on your USB memory device or USB portable audio player connected to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. Notes • This unit supports USB mass storage class devices using FAT 16 or FAT 32. • Only the first partition is displayed in the OSD. You cannot select files in other partitions. • Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per directory are recognized. • Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the requirements. • Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played. • When you connect your USB memory device or USB portable audio player, there may be an about 10 seconds delay. y • While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at the bottom of the OSD. • You can use b / a to skip backward/forward and h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD. • You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the “PLAY STYLE” parameters in “NET/USB MENU” (see page 77). • You can set whether to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 characters after scrolling all characters once by using “FL SCROLL” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79). 94 En RESETTING THE SYSTEM RESETTING THE SYSTEM Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Notes • This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. y To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit to the standby mode. 3 1-2,5 Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly to select “PRESET”. l PROGRAM h VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM NEXT EDIT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE SILENT CINEMA VIDEO 2,4 1 L AUDIO R 3 PRESET-CANCEL Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. 4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel repeatedly to select “RESET”. STRAIGHT STANDBY /ON EFFECT 2 PRESET-RESET y While holding down Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes. ADVANCED OPERATION Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and then press STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT STANDBY /ON EFFECT 5 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY /ON English 95 En TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. No sound No picture 96 En Cause Remedy See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. — The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 27 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 13 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 18-24 “INPUT MODE” is set to “DTS” or “ANALOG”. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO”. No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control) and MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control). Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 13 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the set of front speakers with SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel or SPEAKERS on the remote control. 32 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output and then adjust the volume. 34 “INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG” while playing a source encoded in DTS. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”. 35 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”. 78 35 32, 38 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. Cause The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Remedy See page Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 27, 82 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has set this unit to the standby mode. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output. 34 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 13 Incorrect settings in “SPEAKER LEVEL”. Adjust the “SPEAKER LEVEL” settings. 71 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound is heard from the center speaker. “CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 70 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for “6ch Stereo”) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 57 “SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 70 This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. 39 “SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE” and “SUR. B SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR. B SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 70 “SUR. B SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. B SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 70 “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 70 “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2channel source is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”. 70 No sound is heard from the surround speakers. No sound is heard from the surround back speaker. No sound is heard from the subwoofer. The source does not contain lowfrequency signals. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 97 En TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy See page Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — “INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”. 35 A humming sound is heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 21 The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU” is set to “ON”. Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 79 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 13 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — 98 En Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 19, 21 Some components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem Cause FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM Remedy The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. See page Check the antenna connections. 25 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 47 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 47 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Set preset stations. The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 47 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — Remedy See page 48, 49 ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 8 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 85 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 85 The library code of the remote control and the remote control ID of this unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of this unit with the corresponding remote control library code. 82, 86 English Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Wrong distance or angle. 99 En TROUBLESHOOTING ■ iPod Note In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod (see page 22). Status message Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Set this unit to the standby mode and reconnect the YAMAHA iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 22 Try resetting your iPod. — Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. — Unknown type The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete. Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. Station your iPod back in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 22 Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod. Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable. — Store some other playable music files on your iPod. — 100 En TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Network and USB Problem The PC server/MCX-2000/ Internet radio does not function properly. Cause Remedy See page Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON. Alternately, perform manual configuration according to the current operating environment. 76 The network cable is not connected. Connect it properly. 23 The PC does not have Windows Media Connect 2.0 installed in it. Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 in the PC. — The music is recorded in a format that cannot be played on this unit. This unit cannot play music formats other than WMA, MP3 and WAV (PCM format). Also note that it cannot play certain music files even if these are recorded in the WMA, MP3 or WAV format. Play music recorded in a format that this unit is compatible with. — The music is copyright-protected. This unit cannot play copyright-protected music. — Windows Media Connect 2.0 cannot be connected. The Windows XP PC is logging on to a domain. Log on to the local machine instead of the domain. — The MusicCAST server cannot be connected. You are attempting to connect to MCX-1000. The MusicCAST server that can be connected by this unit is MCX-2000. Use MCX-2000 or the PC server. — Auto Configuration is not executed. Execute “Auto Configure”. 92 The firewall of the network device is activated. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number is variable depending on radio station. Check the firewall setting of the network device. — Connection to the Internet is disconnected. Check the configuration of the network device, and then contact the network connection provider. — The music files and directories in the USB device cannot be viewed. The music files and directories are placed in locations other than the FAT area. Place music files and directories in the FAT area. — You are attempting to browse directory hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory with more than 500 files. Modify the data structure on your USB device. — The USB device cannot be recognized. The connected USB device is other than a USB mass storage class USB memory device or USB portable audio player. This unit can recognize only a USB mass storage class USB memory device or USB portable audio player. Also note that it cannot recognize certain USB devices even when they are devices as described above. 94 Some devices may become easier to recognize when they are inserted before turning this unit on. 28 Turn this unit off then on again. 28 The music in the PC server cannot be played back. The Internet radio cannot be played. “Disconnected” is displayed even when a USB device is present. This unit recognized the USB device as an illegal device. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The IP address is not set properly. English 101 En TROUBLESHOOTING Status message Please wait Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your network. This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a while. — This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a while. — Please wait (Starting Server) This unit is in the middle of waking up MCX-2000 that has been set to the standby mode. Wait for approximately 20 seconds. — Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your network to this unit. Check the connection between this unit and the LAN port on your router or hub. 23 Make sure your router is properly connected and turned on. Also, make sure your modem is properly connected and turned on when you are attempting to listen to Internet radio. 23 Your USB memory device or USB portable audio player has been disconnected from the USB port of this unit. Check the connection between this unit and your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — The PC server or MCX-2000 server previously connected to this unit no longer exists. Connect this unit to the available PC server or MCX-2000. 92 There is a problem with the signal path from your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port of this unit. 28 Try resetting your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — This unit cannot access your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. Try another USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — There is a problem with the signal path from your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port of this unit. 28 Try resetting your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — Make sure Windows Media Connect 2.0 is installed on your PC. — Check that the songs currently stored on your PC are playable (MP3, WMA, and WAV). — Store some other playable music files (MP3, WMA, and WAV) on your PC. — Try preparing a network exclusively for use with this unit to separate it from general network traffic. — Disconnected Access error Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your PC. The network may be overloaded with heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted. List updated The list of the contents stored on your PC server or MCX-2000 has been updated. Bookmark ON The desired Internet radio station has been added to the “Bookmarks” list. Bookmark OFF The stored Internet radio station has been removed from the “Bookmarks” list. 102 En GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Audio information ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/ 24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. ■ ITU-R ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering purposes. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Surround English 103 En GLOSSARY ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ MP3 One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11 (128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. 104 En ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. It does not specify the compression (coding) method so a desired compression method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible with the PCM method (no compression) and some compression methods including the ADPCM method. ■ WMA An audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD. GLOSSARY Video information Sound field program information ■ Component video signal ■ CINEMA DSP With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 105 En SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................... 110 W • Tuning Range [Canada model] .............................................. 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω ....................................................... 130/165/195/240 W • Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Maximum Output Power [Europe model] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 145 W • IEC Output Power [Europe model] 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ...................................................... 105 W • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ...................................................120 or more • Maximum Input Voltage CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ................................... 2.2 V or more • Frequency Response CD, etc. ................................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB V-AUX .................................................... 10 Hz to 20 kHz, –3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ................................................................................ 0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R ........................... 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ......... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/60 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz • Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB • Frequency Response ......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB AM SECTION • Tuning Range [Canada model] .................................................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [Canada model] ................................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [Europe model] .................................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz • Power Consumption [Canada model] ..................................................... 350 W/440 VA [Other models] .................................................................... 360 W • Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less • AC Outlets [Australia model] ......................................... 1 (100 W maximum) [Canada model] ................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [Europe model] ..................................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D).................................. 435 x 161 x 391 mm (17.1 x 6.3 x 15.4 in) • Weight .................................................................. 11.2 kg (24.7 lbs) • Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance OUT (REC) ........................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER ............................................................ 4 V/1.2 kΩ • Volume Control ........................... Mute/–80 dB to +16 dB/1 dB step VIDEO SECTION • Video Format (Gray Back) [Canada model] .................................................................... NTSC [Other models] ........................................................................ PAL • Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL • Rated Input Voltage Composite ..................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video (Y) .................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video (C) ..........................................................0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω Component (Y) ..........................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω Component (PB, PR) .................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω GPL/LGPL This product includes software code subject to the GNU General Public License (GPL) or the GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). The copy, distribution, or change of this software code is licensed under the terms of the GPL or the LGPL. The source code is available at the following website: http://www.global.yamaha.com/download/ • Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more The source code is also available on a physical media (such as a CD-ROM) at actual cost. Contact: AV products division, YAMAHA CORPORATION, 10-1 Nakazawa-cho, Hamamatsu 430-8650, Japan • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB In principle, the source code is offered for 3 years from the day of purchase. 106 En ■ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. APPENDIX-i This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. 9. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program ‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License. ■ GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.] NO WARRANTY Preamble 11. The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its users. 12. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA. Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details. The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items–whatever suits your program. APPENDIX-ii This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages–typically libraries–of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into nonfree programs. When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system. 3. Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”. A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) “Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machinereadable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machinereadable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. APPENDIX-iii It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 7. NO WARRANTY 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. 10. 11. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12. 13. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. APPENDIX-iv END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License). To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the library’s name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ‘Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker. <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice That’s all there is to it! LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES LISTE DES CODES DE COMMANDE LISTE DER FERNBEDIENUNGSCODES LISTA DEI CODICI DI TELECOMANDO LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE MANDO A DISTANCIA LIJST MET AFSTANDSBEDIENINGSCODES СПИСОК КОДОВ ДИСТАНЦИОННОГО УПРАВЛЕНИЯ CABLE TV RECEIVER ABC 10003 ADB 11230, 11269 AICHI DENSHI11512 AMSTRAD 11222 AUNA 11230, 11269 AUSTAR 10276 BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS 10276 BRITISH TELECOM 10003 CABLE & WIRELESS 11068 DX ANTENNA 11500, 11502 FASTWEB 11630 FRANCE TELECOM 10817, 11734 FREEBOX 11482 FUJITSU 11497 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 10003, 10276 GOLDEN CHANNEL 11110 HOMECHOICE11590 JERROLD 10003, 10276 MACAB 10817 MADRITEL 11230 MASPRO 11510 MOTOROLA 10276, 11106, 11483 MR ZAP 11112 MR. ZAP 11112 NEC 11496 NOKIA 11569 NOOS 10817, 11624 NTL 10003, 11060, 11068 ONO 11068 OPTUS 10276 PACE 11060, 11068, 11577 PANASONIC 10375, 11488 PHILIPS 10817 PIONEER 11021, 11500 PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 10003 SAGEM 10817, 11112, 11624 SAMSUNG 11060, 11666 SATBOX 10375 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 11510 SONY 11460 STARCOM 10003 SUMITOMO 11500, 11503, 11504 SUPERCABLE 10276 TELE DANMARK 11016 TELEWEST 11068 THOMSON 11110, 11734 TORX 10003 TOSHIBA 11509 TRI-VISION 11257 UNITED CABLE 10003 UPC 11582 US ELECTRONICS 10276 CABLE/PVR COMBINATION FRANCE TELECOM11734 FREEBOX 11482 MOTOROLA 11106 NOKIA 11569 NOOS 11624 SUPERCABLE 10276 THOMSON 11734 UPC 11582 DBS/PVR COMBINATION @SAT 11300 ATSAT 11300 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 11175 CANALSATELLITE 11339 COMAG 11412 DIGIFUSION 11645 DIRECTV 10099, 10639 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 11237 ECHOSTAR 10610 FORCE 11194 FOXTEL 11356 GBSAT 11214 HUMAX 11176, 11427, 11670, 11675 KATHREIN 11221, 11561 MAXIMUM 11334 NOKIA 11310, 11311 OPENTEL 11412 PACE 11423, 11623 PANASONIC 11320 PHILIPS 10099 REBOX 11214 SAGEM 11253, 11307, 11692 SHARP 11489 SIEMENS 11657 SKY 11175, 11848, 11850 SKYPLUS 11412 SONY 10639 STRONG 11300 THOMSON 11534, 11900 TOPFIELD 11206, 11545 TPS 11253, 11307 ZEHNDER 11075, 11412 SATELLITE RECEIVER @SAT @SKY ABSAT ADB 11300 11334 10713 10642, 11259, 11367, 11473, 11491 AIWA 11514, 11515 AKAI 10200 ALBA 10713, 11284 ALLSAT 10200, 11017, 11043 ALLSONIC 10369 ALLTECH 10713 ALLVISION 11232, 11334, 11412 AMITRONICA 10713 AMPERE 10132 AMSTRAD 10132, 10713, 10847, 10885, 11113, 11175 ANGLO 10713 ANKARO 10369, 10713, 11279 ANTSAT 11017, 11083 ARCON 11043, 11075, 11279 ARNION 11300 ASAT 10200 ASCI 10114, 11334, 11461 ASLF 10713 ASSCOM 10853 ASTON 11129 ASTRA 10713 ASTRO 10133, 10173, 10369, 10658, 11099, 11100, 11113 ATSAT 11300 ATSKY 11334 AUDIOLINE 11429 AURORA 10879 AUSTAR 10642, 10879, 11259 AXIS 10369, 11111 B@YTRONIC 11412 BENTLEY WALKER 11017 BEST 10369 BIG SAT 11457 BLACK DIAMOND 11284 BLAUPUNKT 10173 BLUE SKY 10713 BOCA 10132, 10713, 11232, 11366, 11474 BOSTON 11251 BRAINWAVE 10658 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 10847, 11175 BROCO 10713 BSKYB BT BUBU SAT BUSH 10847, 11175 11296 10713 11284, 11471, 11672 CANAL DIGITAL 10853, 11622 CANAL+ 10853 CANALSATELLITE 10853, 11339, 11853 CENTREX 11457 CGV 11413 CHESS 10114, 10713, 11334 CITYCOM 10299, 10818, 11075, 11176, 11232 COLOMBIA 10132 COLUMBIA 10132 COMAG 10132, 11232, 11366, 11412, 11413, 11579 CONDOR 10369 CONRAD 10132, 10369 COSHIP 11457 CYRUS 10200 D-BOX 10873 DAEWOO 10713, 11111, 11296, 11743 DELTASAT 11075 DGTEC 11242 DIGENIUS 10299, 11161 DIGIALITY 11685 DIGIFUSION 11645 DIGIQUEST 11457, 11473 DIGISAT 11232 DIGISKY 11457 DIGITALL WORLD 11227 DIJAM 11296 DIRECTV 10099, 10639 DISTRATEL 10885, 11283, 11704 DMT 11075 DNT 10200 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 11237 DUNE 10369 DX ANTENNA 11530 ECHOSTAR 10167, 10610, 10713, 10853, 11200, 11323, 11409, 11467, 11473, 11477 EINHELL 10132, 10713 ELAP 10587, 10713, 11129, 11567 ELSAT 10713 ELTA 10200, 10369 EMME ESSE 10369 EMTECH 11214 ENGEL 10713, 11017, 11251 APPENDIX-v EURIEULT EUROLINE EUROPHON EUROSKY 10885 11251 10132, 10299 10114, 10132, 10262, 10299, 10369 EUROSTAR 10818, 10898 EUTELSAT 10713 FENNER 10369, 10713 FERGUSON 10711, 11291 FINLUX 10573 FLAIR MATE 10713 FMD 11457 FORCE 11194 FORTEC STAR 11017, 11083 FOXTEL 10879, 11356 FRACARRO 10125 FTEMAXIMAL10369, 10713, 11556 FUBA 10173, 10262, 10299, 10369, 10573, 11161, 11214 FUGIONKYO 10125 GALAXIS 10369, 10853, 11111, 11557 GARDINER 10818 GARNET 11075 GBSAT 11214 GECCO 11157, 11273, 11412 GENERAL SATELLITE 11176 GF 11043 GF STAR 11043 GLOBO 11251, 11626 GOD DIGITAL 10200 GOLD BOX 10292, 10853 GOLDEN INTERSTAR 11283 GOLDVISION 11017 GOODMANS 11246, 11284 GRUNDIG 10173, 10847, 10853, 10879, 11291 HAENSEL & GRETEL 10132 HANDAN 11622 HANSEATIC 11099, 11100 HAUPPAUGE 11672 HB 11214 HDT 11011 HE@D 11279 HIRSCHMANN10125, 10173, 10299, 10369, 10573, 11111, 11232, 11412 HITACHI 11250, 11284, 11518, 11523, 11525 HUMAX 11176, 11225, 11427, 11648, 11670, 11675, 11743 HUTH 10132, 11017, 11075 HYUNDAI 11011, 11075 ICAN 11367 ID DIGITAL 11176 ILLUSION SAT11557 IMPERIAL 11429 INGELEN 10114 INTERNATIONAL 10132 INTERSTAR 11017, 11214 APPENDIX-vi JAEGER JVC 11334 11507, 11531, 11532 K-SAT 10713 KAMM 10713 KAON 11300 KATELCO 11111 KATHREIN 10114, 10173, 10200, 10249, 10442, 10480, 10504, 10553, 10622, 10658, 10713, 10818, 10898, 11221, 11416, 11561, 11567 KENNEX 10125 KENWOOD 10853 KEY WEST 10132 KITON 10114 KOSCOM 11043 KOSMOS 10442 KREILING 10114, 10249, 10658, 11461 KREISELMEYER 10173 L&S ELECTRONIC 10132, 10369, 11043, 11334 LABGEAR 11296 LASAT 10132, 10173, 10299, 10369 LEMON 11461 LENCO 10369, 10713 LENOXX 11611 LG 11075, 11226 LIFESAT 10132, 10299, 10369, 10713, 11043 LIFETEC 10587 LODOS 11284 LOGIX 11017, 11075 LORENZEN 10132, 10299, 10867, 11161, 11579 LUPUS 10369 LUXOR 10573 LUXORIT 11681 M VISION 11557 MANATA 10132, 10713 MANHATTAN 11017, 11083 MARANTZ 10200 MASPRO 10173, 10713, 11520, 11530 MATSUI 10173, 11284 MAXIMUM 11075, 11334, 11685 MDS 11225 MEDIACOM 11206 MEDIASAT 10292, 10853 MEDION 10132, 10299, 10369, 10713, 11043, 11075, 11232, 11334, 11412, 11626 MEDISON 10713 MEGA 10200 MELECTRONIC 10818 METRONIC 10132, 10713, 10818, 10885, 11279, 11283, 11334, 11691, 11704 METZ 10173 MICRO 10713 MICRO ELEKTRONIC 10713 MICROMAXX 10299, 10369 MICROSTAR 11075 MICROTEC 10713 MORGAN'S 10132, 10200, 10713, 11232, 11412 MULTICHOICE10642, 10879 MYRYAD 10200 MYSAT 10713 NEC 11270, 11519 NEOTION 11334 NETGEM 11322 NETSAT 10099 NEUF TELECOM 11322 NEUF TV 11322 NEUHAUS 10713 NEULING 10132, 11232 NEUSAT 10587, 10713, 11279 NEVELING 11161 NEXTWAVE 11017 NIKKO 10200, 10713 NOKIA 10573, 10751, 10853, 10873, 11023, 11223, 11310, 11311, 11723 NORDMENDE 11611 OKANO 10442 OPENTEL 11232, 11412 OPTEX 10114, 10713, 11043, 11283 OPTUS 10879 ORBIS 11232, 11334, 11412 ORBITECH 10114, 10541, 11099, 11100 P/SAT 11232 PACE 10200, 10329, 10720, 10847, 10853, 10867, 11175, 11323, 11423, 11623, 11850 PACIFIC 11284 PACKARD BELL 11111 PALCOM 10299, 10587, 11161, 11409 PANASAT 10879 PANASONIC 10847, 11104, 11304, 11320, 11404, 11508, 11526, 11527, 11528 PANDA 10173 PANSAT 11011 PATRIOT 10132 PHILIPS 10099, 10133, 10173, 10200, 10292, 10818, 10853, 10898, 11114, 11118, 11672 PHONOTREND11017, 11200 PILOTIME 11339 PINO 11334 PIONEER 10292, 10329, 10352, 10853, 11308 PLASMATIC 10442 PMB PREISNER 10713 10132, 10262, 11113, 11366 PREMIER 10292 PREMIERE 10292, 10873, 11429 PRIMACOM 11111 QUADRAL 10369 QUELLE 10299 RADIOLA 10200 RADIX 11113 RCA 11291 REBOX 11214 RED STAR 10369 REGAL 11251 RFT 10200, 10541 ROADSTAR 10713, 10853 ROVER 10369, 10713 S-ZWO 11207 SAB 11251 SABA 10885 SAGEM 10820, 11114, 11253, 11307, 11690, 11691, 11692, 11694 SAMSUNG 10853, 11017, 11206, 11243, 11293, 11458, 11570 SANYO 11219 SAT CONTROL11300 SAT TEAM 10713 SATEC 10713 SATELCO 10369, 11232 SATPLUS 11100 SATSTATION 11083 SCHAUB LORENZ 11214 SCHNEIDER 11206, 11251 SCHWAIGER 10132, 10504, 10587, 10885, 11075, 11083, 11111, 11334, 11412, 11457, 11474 SCS 10299 SEDEA ELECTRONIQUE 10125, 10132, 11206, 11283 SEG 10114, 10369, 11075, 11251, 11626 SEPTIMO 10885 SERINO 10610 SERVISAT 10713, 11251 SHARP 10541, 11489, 11513, 11517 SIEMENS 10173, 11657 SILVA 10299 SKANTIN 10713 SKARDIN 10587 SKR 10713 SKT 11449 SKY 10099, 10847, 11175, 11848, 11849, 11850 SKY ITALIA 11848, 11849 SKY XL 11251, 11412 SKY+ 11175 SKYMASTER 10587, 10713, 11075, 11200, 11409, 11611 SKYMAX 10200 SKYPLUS 11232, 11334, 11412 SKYSAT 10114, 10713 SKYVISION 11334 SL 10132, 10299 SM ELECTRONIC 10587, 10713, 11200, 11409 SMART 10132, 10299, 10713, 11113, 11157, 11232, 11273, 11413 SONY 10282, 10292, 10639, 10847, 10853, 11524, 11558 SR 10132 STARLITE 10200 STREAM 11848 STRONG 10125, 10132, 10369, 10713, 10820, 10853, 10879, 11146, 11157, 11258, 11300, 11409, 11430, 11626 SUNNY 11300 SUNNY SOUND 10369 SUNSAT 10713 SUNSTAR 10132, 10369, 10642 SYSTEC 11334 TARBS 11225 TBOSTON 11457 TEAC 11225, 11227, 11251, 11322 TECHNISAT 10114, 10200, 10262, 10541, 11099, 11100, 11322 TECHNOMATE 11283, 11610 TECHNOSONIC 11672 TECHNOTREND 11429 TECHNOWELT10132 TECHSAN 11017 TECHWOOD 10114, 11284 TEKCOMM 11017 TELE SYSTEM ELECTRONIC 11611 TELECIEL 11043 TELEKA 10262 TELESTAR 10114, 11099, 11100, 11251, 11334 TELESYSTEM 11251, 11409 TELETECH 10114 TELEVES 10132, 11214, 11300 TELEWIRE 11232 TEVEBOX 11681 TEVION 10713, 11409, 11622 THOMSON 10292, 10711, 10713, 10820, 10847, 10853, 11046, 11175, 11291, 11498, 11534, 11900 TINY 11672 TIOKO 10132 TOKAI 10200 TONNA 10587, 10713, 11611 TOPFIELD 11206, 11207, 11208, 11545, 11722 TOSHIBA 11501, 11516, 11530 TPS 10820, 11253, 11307 TRIAD 10372 TRIAX 10114, 10132, 10200, 10713, 10853, 11099, 11113, 11157, 11227, 11251, 11291, 11296 TT-MICRO 11429 TURNSAT 10713 TWINNER 10713 UEC 10879 UNIDEN 11521 UNISAT 10132, 10200 UNITED 11251 UNIVERSUM 10114, 10173, 10299, 11099, 11251 VAN HUNEN 11161 VARIOSAT 10173 VEGA 10369 VENTANA 10200 VESTEL 10114, 11251 VISIONIC 10125, 11279, 11283 VISIOSAT 10114, 10713, 11129, 11457 VTECH 10818 WISI 10173, 10299, 10372, 10406, 10638 WISPLUS 11258 WORLDSAT 10114, 11214, 11251, 11323 XRYPTON 10369 XSAT 10713, 10847, 11214, 11323 XTREME 11300 YAKUMO 11413 ZEHNDER 10114, 10369, 10504, 10818, 11075, 11232, 11251, 11334, 11412, 11413 HDTV DECORDER PIONEER SHARP 11010 11010 OTHER VIDEO ACCESSORIES ABS 11272 ALIENWARE 11272 CYBERPOWER11272 GATEWAY 11272 HAUPPAUGE 11408 HEWLETT PACKARD 11272 HOWARD COMPUTERS 11272 HP 11272 HUSH 11272 IBUYPOWER 11272 LINKSYS 11272 MEDIA CENTER PC 11272 MICROSOFT 11272 MIND 11272 NIVEUS MEDIA 11272 NORTHGATE 11272 PACKARD BELL 11272 PINNACLE SYSTEMS 11447 PIONEER 11010 RICAVISION 11272 SHARP 11010 SONY 11272, 11733 STACK 9 11272 SYSTEMAX 11272 TOSHIBA 11272 TOUCH 11272 VIEWSONIC 11272 VOODOO 11272 ZT GROUP 11272 TV A.R. SYSTEMS20374, 20455 ACER 21339 ACURA 20009 ADL 21217 ADMIRAL 20093, 20163, 20264 ADVENT 20817 AGB 20516 AIKO 20009, 20264 AIM 20805 AIWA 21180 AKAI 20009, 20035, 20037, 20163, 20178, 20208, 20218, 20264, 20361, 20371, 20433, 20473, 20480, 20516, 20548, 20556, 20602, 20606, 20631, 20696, 20714, 20715, 20729, 20745, 20753, 21207 AKIBA 20037, 20218, 20455 AKITO 20037 AKURA 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20412, 20668, 20714, 21037, 21982 ALBA 20009, 20037, 20163, 20218, 20355, 20371, 20418, 20443, 20487, 20668, 20714, 21037 ALL-TEL 20865 ALLSTAR 20037 AMPLIVISION 20370 AMSTRAD 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20371, 20412, 20433, 20516, 21037 ANAM 20009, 20250 ANAM NATIONAL2 0250 ANDERSSON 21149, 21163 ANGLO 20009, 20264 ANITECH 20009, 20037 ANSONIC 20009, 20292, 20370, 20668 APEX DIGITAL20890, 21217 ARDEM 20037, 20714 ARISTONA 20037, 20556 ART 21037 ASORA 20009 ASUKA 20218, 20264 AUDIOSONIC 20009, 20037, 20109, 20218, 20264, 20370, 20374, 20486, 20714, 20715 AUDIOTON 20264, 20486 AUDIOWORLD20698 AWA 20009, 20108, 20606 AXXENT 20009 BAIRD 20208 BANG & OLUFSEN 20565 BASIC LINE 20009, 20037, 20218, 20374, 20455, 20556, 20668, 21037, 21163 BAUER 20805 BAUR 20037, 20361, 20512 BEAUMARK 20178 BEKO 20037, 20370, 20418, 20486, 20606, 20714, 20715, 20808, 21037 BELSON 20698 BEON 20037, 20418 BERTHEN 20668 BESTAR 20037, 20370, 20374 BESTAR-DAEWOO 20374 BLACK DIAMOND 20614, 20821, 21037, 21909 BLAUPUNKT 20170, 20195, 20200, 20327, 20455 BLUE SKY 20037, 20218, 20455, 20487, 20556, 20668, 20714, 20715, 20808, 21037, 21191 BLUESKY 21388 BOOTS 20009 BOXLIGHT 20736 BPL 20037, 20896 BRANDT 20109, 20335, 20560, 20625, 20714 BRINKMANN 20037, 20418, 20486, 20668 BTC 20218 BUSH 20009, 20037, 20208, 20218, 20264, 20355, 20361, 20371, 20374, 20487, 20556, 20614, 20617, 20660, 20668, 20698, 20714, 20778, 21037, 21243 BYDESIGN 21309, 21311 APPENDIX-vii CANTON CARAD 20218 20610, 20668, 21037 CARENA 20037, 20455 CARVER 20054, 20170 CASCADE 20009, 20037 CASIO 20037 CATHAY 20037 CCE 20037 CELEBRITY 20000 CELESTIAL 20820, 20821 CENTREX 20780 CENTRUM 21037 CENTURION 20037 CGE 20074, 20370, 20418 CHANGHONG 20821 CIMLINE 20009, 20218 CITIZEN 20060 CITY 20009 CLARIVOX 20037 CLATRONIC 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20370, 20371, 20606, 20714 CLAYTON 21037 CONDOR 20009, 20037, 20264, 20370, 20411, 20418 CONIA 20754 CONRAC 20808 CONTEC 20009, 20037 CONTINENTAL EDISON 20109, 20487 COSMEL 20037 CROSLEY 20054, 20074 CROWN 20009, 20037, 20053, 20208, 20370, 20412, 20418, 20486, 20487, 20606, 20712, 20714, 20715, 21037 CS ELECTRONICS 20218 CURTIS MATHES 20054, 20060, 20093, 20145 CYBERTRON 20218 CYTRONIX 21298 D-VISION 20556 DAEWOO 20009, 20037, 20218, 20374, 20556, 20634, 20865, 20880, 21307, 21909 DAINICHI 20218 DANSAI 20009, 20035, 20037, 20208 DANSETTE 20412 DANTAX 20714, 20715 DAVIS 20736 DAYTEK 21207 DAYTON 20009, 21207 DAYTRON 20374 DE GRAAF 20208, 20548 DECCA 20037, 20516 DENKO 20264 DENON 20145, 20511 DENVER 20037, 20587, 21189 DESMET 20009, 20037 DIAMANT 20037 DIAMOND 20825 APPENDIX-viii DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS 20698 DIGATRON 20037 DIGILINE 20105, 20668 DIGITAL LIFE 20780, 20872, 20891 DIGITOR 20037, 20698 DIGIX 20880 DIXI 20009, 20037 DL 20891 DMTECH 21338 DOMEOS 20668 DOMLAND 20394 DREAM VISION 21704 DSE 20698 DUAL 20037, 20352, 20394 DVX 20891 DYNATRON 20037 E-ELITE 20218 ECCO 20773 EDISON-MINERVA 20487 EIKI 20735 ELBE 20292, 20411, 20435, 20516, 20610 ELBE-SHARP 20516 ELECTROBAND 20000 ELECTROGRAPH 21755 ELEKTA 20264 ELIN 20009, 20037, 20361, 20548 ELITE 20218 ELTA 20009, 20264 EMERSON 20037, 20178, 20361, 20370, 20371, 20486, 20714, 21909 ENVISION 21365 ERRES 20037 ESC 20037 ETRON 20001, 20009 EUROFEEL 20264 EUROMAN 20037, 20264 EUROPA 20037 EUROPHON 20516 EVOLUTION 21756 EXQUISIT 20037 FENNER 20009, 20374 FERGUSON 20037, 20053, 20109, 20195, 20335, 20443, 20548, 20560, 20625, 21037 FIDELITY 20037, 20163, 20264, 20361, 20371, 20412, 20512 FINLANDIA 20163, 20208, 20346, 20548 FINLUX 20037, 20105, 20346, 20411, 20473, 20480, 20492, 20516, 20631, 20714, 20715, 20808 FIRSTLINE 20009, 20037, 20208, 20361, 20374, 20411, 20556, 20668, 20714, 20808, 21037, 21191, 21307, 21363, 21388 FISHER 20208, 20370, 20555 FLINT 20037, 20218, 20264, 20455, 20610 FORCE 21149 FORMENTI 20037 FORTRESS 20093 FRABA 20037, 20370 FRIAC 20009, 20037, 20370, 20610 FRONTECH 20009, 20163, 20264 FUJIMARO 20865 FUJITSU 20009, 20683, 20853 FUJITSU GENERAL 20009, 20683 FUJITSU SIEMENS 21298 FUNAI 20264, 20668 GALAXI 20037 GALAXIS 20037, 20370 GATEWAY 21755, 21756 GBC 20009, 20218, 20374 GE 20093, 20178, 20560, 20625, 20735 GEC 20037, 20163, 20361, 20516 GELOSO 20009, 20374 GENERAL TECHNIC 20009 GENESIS 20009 GENEXXA 20009, 20163, 20218 GERICOM 20808, 20865, 20880, 21206, 21217, 21298 GOLDFUNK 20668 GOLDSTAR 20001, 20037, 20109, 20163, 20178, 20361, 20377, 20606, 20714, 20715 GOODING 20487 GOODMANS 20009, 20035, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20335, 20360, 20371, 20374, 20480, 20487, 20516, 20556, 20560, 20634, 20668, 20714, 20808, 20880, 21037, 21163, 21909 GORENJE 20370 GPM 20218 GRADIENTE 20053, 20170 GRAETZ 20163, 20361, 20371, 20487, 20714 GRANADA 20037, 20108, 20163, 20208, 20226, 20473, 20516, 20548, 20560 GRANDIN 20009, 20037, 20163, 20374, 20455, 20610, 20668, 20714, 20715, 20865, 20880, 21037, 21191, 21374, 21388 GRUNDIG 20037, 20195, 20443, 20487, 20556, 20587, 20740, 21223 H&B 20808 HAIER 20698, 20891 HALLMARK 20178 HANIMEX 20218 HANSEATIC 20009, 20037, 20361, 20377, 20394, 20556, 20634, 20714, 20808 HANTAREX 20009, 20037, 20516, 20829, 20865, 21338 HANTOR 20037 HARMAN/KARDON 20054 HARSPER 20865 HARWA 20773, 21196, 21269 HARWOOD 20009, 20037, 20412, 20487 HAVERMY 20093 HCM 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20412, 20418 HELIOS 20865 HEMA 20009 HIKONA 20218 HINARI 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20355 HISAWA 20218, 20455, 20610, 20714 HISENSE 20508, 20556, 20780, 21363 HITACHI 20037, 20105, 20108, 20109, 20145, 20163, 20178, 20225, 20473, 20480, 20481, 20492, 20516, 20548, 20578, 20634, 20744, 20797, 21037, 21149, 21194, 21576 HITACHI FUJIAN 20108 HITSU 20009, 20218, 20455, 20610 HOEHER 20714, 20865 HOME ELECTRONICS 20606 HORNYPHON 20037 HUANYU 20374 HUGOSON 20890, 21217 HUMAX 21295 HYPER 20009 HYPSON 20037, 20264, 20455, 20668, 20714, 20715, 21037 HYUNDAI 20860, 20865, 20876, 21152, 21244, 21294 IBERIA 20037 ICE 20218, 20264, 20371 ICES 20218 IIYAMA 20877, 21217 IMPERIAL 20037, 20074, 20370, 20418 INDIANA 20037 INFINITY 20054 INFOCUS 20736, 20752, 21164, 21206 INGELEN 20163, 20487, 20610, 20714 INGERSOLL 20009 INNO HIT 20009, 20516, 21163 INNOWERT 20865, 21298 INTERBUY 20037, 20264 INTERFUNK 20037, 20163, 20200, 20327, 20361, 20512 INTERNAL 20037, 21909 INTERVISION 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20377, 20394, 20455, 20486, 20487 IRRADIO 20218, 20371 ISUKAI 20037, 20218, 20455 ITS 20264, 20371 ITT 20163, 20208, 20346, 20361, 20473, 20480, 20548, 20610 ITT NOKIA 20163, 20208, 20346, 20361, 20473, 20480, 20548, 20606, 20610 ITV 20037, 20264, 20374 IX 20877 JBL 20054 JCB 20000 JDV 21982 JENSEN 20817 JMB 20443, 20556, 20634 JOCEL 20712 JUBILEE 20556 JVC 20053, 20093, 20218, 20371, 20418, 20606, 20650, 20653, 20683, 20731 KAISUI 20009, 20037, 20218, 20455 KAPSCH 20163, 20361 KARCHER 20264, 20606, 20610, 20714, 20778 KATHREIN 20556 KAWA 20371 KB ARISTOCRAT 20163 KENDO 20037, 20411, 20610 KENNEDY KENNEX KIOTA KITON KNEISSEL 20435 21037 20001 20037, 20668 20037, 20292, 20374, 20411, 20435, 20556, 20610 KONKA 20037, 20218, 20371, 20418, 20587, 20641, 20714, 20754 KONTAKT 20487 KORPEL 20037 KOYODA 20009 KREISEN 20876 KYOSHU 20412, 20418 KYOTO 20163 L&S ELECTRONIC 20714, 20808 LASAT 20486 LEADER 20009 LECSON 20037 LEMAIR 20411 LENCO 20037, 20374 LEYCO 20037, 20264 LG 20037, 20178, 20442, 20556, 20698, 20714, 20715, 20829, 21146, 21148, 21191 LIESENK & TTER 20037 LIESENKOTTER 20037, 20327 LIFETEC 20037, 20218, 20374, 20668, 20714, 21037 LOCAL INDIA TV 20264, 20371, 20602 LODOS 21037 LOEWE 20037, 20136, 20292, 20512, 20516, 20633, 20790 LOGIK 20001, 20773, 20880, 21217 LOGIX 20668 LUKER 21982 LUMA 21037 LUX MAY 20009, 20037 LUXOR 20163, 20208, 20361, 20473, 20480, 20548, 20631, 21037, 21163 LXI 20054, 20156, 20178 M ELECTRONIC 20009, 20037, 20105, 20109, 20163, 20346, 20374, 20480 MADISON 20037 MAGNADYNE 20516 MAGNAFON 20516 MAGNAVOX 20054, 20780 MAGNUM 20037, 20714, 20715 MANESTH 20035, 20037, 20264 MANHATTAN 20037, 20668, 20778, 21037 MARANTZ 20037, 20054, 20412, 20556, 20704 MARK 20037, 20714, 20715 MASUDA 20009, 20218 MATSUI 20009, 20035, 20037, 20195, 20208, 20335, 20355, 20371, 20433, 20443, 20455, 20487, 20516, 20556, 20714, 21037 MATSUSHITA 20250, 20650 MAXENT 21755 MEDIATOR 20037 MEDION 20037, 20512, 20556, 20668, 20698, 20714, 20808, 20880, 21037, 21248 MEGAS 20610 MEGATRON 20145, 20178 MEI 21037 MELECTRONIC 20009, 20037, 20105, 20163, 20195, 20346, 20374, 20411, 20480, 20492, 20512, 20634, 20714 MEMOREX 20009, 20060, 20178, 20250, 21037 MERCURY 20009 METRONIC 20625 METZ 20037, 20367, 20388, 20447, 20587, 20668, 20746, 21163 MGA 20178 MICROMAXX 20037, 20668, 20808, 21037 MICROSTAR 20808 MIKOMI 21149 MINATO 20037 MINERVA 20108, 20487, 20516 MINOKA 20412 MITSUBISHI 20037, 20093, 20108, 20178, 20250, 20512, 20556, 21037 MIVAR 20292, 20516, 20609 MONACO 20009 MORGAN'S 20037 MOTOROLA 20093 MTC 20060, 20370, 20512 MTLOGIC 20714 MULTITEC 20037, 20486, 20668, 21037 MULTITECH 20009, 20037, 20264, 20486 MURPHY 20163 MUSIKLAND 20218 MYRYAD 20556 NAD 20156, 20178, 20361 NAIKO 20037, 20606, 21982 NAT 20226 NATIONAL NEC 20226 20009, 20053, 20156, 20170, 20374, 20455, 20587, 20704, 21704 NECKERMANN 20037, 20200, 20327, 20370, 20411, 20418, 20556 NEI 20037, 20371 NEOVIA 20865, 20876, 21206, 21318, 21338, 21371, 21373, 21376, 21390 NETSAT 20037 NETTV 21755 NEUFUNK 20037, 20218, 20556, 20610, 20714 NIKKAI 20009, 20035, 20037, 20218, 20264 NIKKO 20178 NOKIA 20163, 20208, 20346, 20361, 20374, 20473, 20480, 20548, 20606, 20610, 20631 NORCENT 21365 NORDMENDE 20037, 20109, 20195, 20560, 20714 NORMEREL 20037 NOVATRONIC 20037, 20105, 20374 OCEANIC 20163, 20208, 20361, 20473, 20548 OKANO 20009, 20037, 20370 OMEGA 20264 OMNI 20891 ONIMAX 20714 ONWA 20218, 20371, 20433 OPTIMUS 20250, 20650 OPTONICA 20093 ORION 20037, 20355, 20412, 20443, 20516, 20556, 20714, 20880 ORLINE 20037, 20218 ORMOND 20668, 21037 ORSOWE 20516 OSAKI 20037, 20218, 20264, 20355, 20374, 20412, 20556 OSO 20218 OSUME 20037, 20218 OTTO VERSAND 20037, 20093, 20109, 20226, 20361, 20512, 20556 PACIFIC 20443, 20556, 20714, 21037 PALLADIUM 20037, 20370, 20411, 20418, 20714 APPENDIX-ix PALSONIC 20001, 20037, 20264, 20418, 20698, 20773 PANAMA 20037, 20264 PANASHIBA 20001 PANASONIC 20037, 20163, 20226, 20250, 20361, 20367, 20516, 20548, 20650, 20853, 21210, 21310 PANAVISION 20037, 20411 PATHE CINEMA 20163 PAUSA 20009 PENNEY 20060, 20156, 20178 PERDIO 20037, 20163 PHILCO 20037, 20054, 20074, 20145, 20370, 20418 PHILIPS 20009, 20037, 20054, 20200, 20361, 20374, 20556, 20772, 21756 PHOENIX 20037, 20486 PHONOLA 20037 PIONEER 20037, 20109, 20163, 20361, 20486, 20512, 20679, 20760 PIONIER 20486 PLANTRON 20009 PLAYSONIC 20037, 20714, 20715 POLAROID 20865 PORTLAND 20374 POWERPOINT 20037, 20487, 20698 PRANDONI-PRINCE 20361, 20516 PRIMA 20264, 20412 PRINSTON 21037 PRINZ 20361 PROFEX 20009, 20163, 20361 PROFI 20009 PROFITRONIC 20037 PROLINE 20037, 20411, 20625, 20634, 21037 PROSONIC 20037, 20668, 20714 PROTECH 20009, 20037, 20264, 20418, 20486, 20668, 21037 PROTON 20178 PROVISION 20037, 20556, 20714 PROXIMA 20735 PYE 20037, 20374, 20556 QUADRAL 20218 QUASAR 20009, 20250, 20650, 20865 QUELLE 20037, 20074, 20200, 20327, 20361, 20512, 20668, 21037 R-LINE 20037 RADIALVA 20218 APPENDIX-x RADIOLA 20037, 20556 RADIOMARELLI 20037, 20516 RADIOSHACK 20037, 20178 RADIOTONE 20009, 20037, 20264, 20412, 20668, 21037 RCA 20093, 20625, 20679 REALISTIC 20178 REDIFFUSION 20346, 20361, 20548 REFLEX 20037, 20668, 21037 RELISYS 20865, 20876, 20877, 20878, 21206, 21207, 21268, 21298 REOC 20714 REVOX 20037 REX 20163, 20264, 20411 RFT 20037, 20264 RINEX 20773 ROADSTAR 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20418, 20668, 20714, 21037, 21189 ROVER 20877 ROWA 20698, 20712 ROYAL LUX 20335, 20412 SABA 20109, 20163, 20250, 20335, 20361, 20498, 20516, 20548, 20560, 20625, 20714 SAGEM 20455, 20610, 20830, 21313 SAISHO 20009, 20264, 20516 SAIVOD 20037, 20668, 20712, 21037, 21163, 21982 SAKAI 20163 SALORA 20163, 20208, 20361, 20480, 20516, 20548, 20631 SALSA 20335 SAMBERS 20516 SAMPO 21755 SAMSUNG 20009, 20037, 20060, 20163, 20178, 20208, 20264, 20370, 20482, 20556, 20587, 20618, 20644 SANSUI 20037, 20727, 20729, 20861 SANTON 20009 SANYO 20088, 20108, 20170, 20208, 20370, 20555, 20704, 20735 SBR 20037, 20556 SCEPTRE 21217 SCHAUB LORENZ 20361, 20374, 20486, 20548, 20606, 20714, 21191 SCHNEIDER 20037, 20163, 20218, 20352, 20361, 20371, 20394, 20556, 20668, 20714, 21037 SCOTCH 20178 SCOTLAND 20163 SCOTT 20178 SEARS 20054, 20156, 20178 SEAWAY 20634 SEELVER 21037 SEG 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20487, 20634, 20668, 21037, 21163 SEI 20516 SEI-SINUDYNE 20037, 20516 SELECO 20163, 20264, 20346, 20371, 20411, 20435 SEMP 20156 SENCORA 20009 SENTRA 20035 SERINO 20093, 20455, 20610 SHARP 20053, 20093, 20200, 20491, 20516, 21163, 21193 SHENG CHIA 20093 SHINTOSHI 20037 SHIVAKI 20037, 20443 SIAREM 20516 SIEMENS 20037, 20195, 20200, 20327 SIERA 20556 SIESTA 20370 SILVA 20037, 20361 SILVA SCHNEIDER 20037 SILVER 20361, 20715 SILVERCREST 21037 SINGER 20009, 20335, 20433, 20435 SINOTEC 20773 SINUDYNE 20516 SKY 20037, 20880 SKYSONIC 20696 SLIDING 20865, 20880, 21318, 21374, 21388 SLX 20668 SMARAGD 20487 SOEMTRON 20865, 21298 SOLAVOX 20037, 20163, 20361, 20548 SONAWA 20218 SONIKO 20037 SONITRON 20208, 20370 SONOKO 20009, 20037 SONOLOR 20163, 20208, 20361, 20548 SONTEC 20009, 20037, 20370 SONY 20000, 20037, 20053, 20093, 20145, 20156, 20170, 20250, 20353, 21100, 21505, 21751 SOUND & VISION 20374 SOUNDESIGN 20178 SOUNDWAVE 20037, 20418, 20715 SPECTRA 20009 SSANGYONG 20009 STANDARD 20009, 20037, 20218, 20374, 21037 STARLITE 20009, 20037, 20264 STENWAY 20218 STERN 20163, 20411 STEVISON 21982 STRATO 20009, 20037, 20264 STRONG 21149, 21163 SUNKAI 20355, 20455, 20487, 20610, 20865 SUNSTAR 20009, 20037, 20264, 20371 SUNWOOD 20037 SUPERLA 20516 SUPERSCAN 20093 SUPERSONIC 21189 SUPERTECH 20009, 20037, 20218 SUPRA 20009 SUPREME 20000 SUSUMU 20218, 20335 SVA 20587, 20865, 20872 SYLVANIA 20054 SYSLINE 20037 T+A 20447 TANDBERG 20367 TANDY 20093, 20163, 20218 TARGA 21307 TASHIKO 20163 TATUNG 20037, 20516, 21756 TCM 20714, 20808 TEAC 20009, 20037, 20170, 20178, 20264, 20412, 20418, 20455, 20512, 20668, 20698, 20712, 21037, 21149, 21755, 21909 TEC 20009, 20037 TECH LINE 20037, 20668 TECHNICS 20250, 20556, 20650 TECHNISAT 20556 TECHNISSON 20714 TECHNOSONIC 20556 TECHWOOD 21163 TECNIMAGEN 20556 TEDELEX 20009, 20891 TEKNIKA 20054, 20060 TELECOR 20394 TELEFUNKEN 20037, 20074, 20109, 20335, 20346, 20486, 20498, 20560, 20625, 20714, 20896 TELEFUSION 20037 TELEGAZI 20037 TELEMAGIC 20735 TELESONIC TELESTAR TELESYSTEM TELETECH 20037 20037, 20556 20876 20009, 20037, 20668, 21037 TELEVIEW 20037 TEMPEST 20009 TENNESSEE 20037 TENSAI 20009, 20037, 20105, 20218, 20371, 20374, 20377, 20715, 21037 TENSON 20009 TEVION 20556, 20668, 20714, 20808, 21037, 21248, 21298 TEXET 20009, 20218, 20374 THOMSON 20037, 20109, 20335, 20560, 20625 THORN 20035, 20037, 20074, 20109, 20335, 20361, 20512 TINY 21269 TINY DIGITAL 20660 TMK 20178 TOKAI 20009, 20037, 20163, 20374, 20668, 21037 TOKAIDO 21037 TOKYO 20035 TOMASHI 20218 TONGTEL 20780 TOSHIBA 20035, 20060, 20109, 20156, 20195, 20241, 20508, 20618, 20650, 20714, 20736, 21163, 21164, 21704 TRANS CONTINENS 20037, 20668, 21037 TRANS-CONTINENTS 20865, 21374 TRANSONIC 20009, 20037, 20587, 20698, 20712 TRIDENT 20516 TRISTAR 20218 TRIUMPH 20346, 20516, 20556 TVTEXT 95 20556 UHER 20037, 20374, 20418, 20480, 20486 ULTRAVOX 20037 UNIC LINE 20037, 20455 UNITED 20037, 20714, 20715, 21037 UNIVERSAL 20037 UNIVERSUM 20009, 20037, 20074, 20105, 20170, 20200, 20264, 20327, 20346, 20361, 20370, 20411, 20418, 20473, 20480, 20492, 20512, 20618, 20631, 20668, 21037, 21163 UNIVOX 20037, 20163 V2MAX 20865 V7 VIDEOSEVEN 21376, 21755 V7VIDEOSEVEN 20880 VESTEL 20037, 20556, 20668, 21037, 21163 VICTOR 20053, 20653 VIDEOCON 20508 VIDEOLOGIC 20218 VIDEOLOGIQUE 20218 VIDIKRON 20054, 20735 VIDTECH 20178 VIEWPIA 20876 VIEWSONIC 20797, 21755 VIORE 21207 VISION 20037 VIZIO 21756 VOXSON 20163, 20178, 20418 WALTHAM 20037, 20109, 20163, 20418, 20443, 20668, 21037 WARDS 20000, 20054, 20060, 20156, 20178 WATSON 20009, 20037, 20218, 20394, 20668, 21037 WAYCON 20156 WEGA 20037 WELLTECH 20714 WESTINGHOUSE 20890 WHARFEDALE 20037, 20556 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 20037, 21909 WINDSOR 21037 WINDY SAM 20556 WORLD-OF-VISION 20865, 20877, 20880, 20890, 21298 X-VIEW 21191 XENIUS 20634 XLOGIC 20860 XORO 21196, 21217, 21243 XRYPTON 20037 YAMADA 21340 YAMAHA 20650, 20769, 20797, 21405, 21406, 21407, 21576 YAMISHI 20455 YAPSHE 20250 YOKAN 20037 YOKO 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264 ZANUSSI ZENITH 20264 20178, 21909 PVR ABS 31972 ALIENWARE 31972 CYBERPOWER 31972 DELL 31972 GATEWAY 31972 HEWLETT PACKARD 31972 HOWARD COMPUTERS 31972 HP 31972 HUSH 31972 IBUYPOWER 31972 JVC 31279 LINKSYS 31972 MEDIA CENTER PC 31972 MICROSOFT 31972 MIND 31972 NIVEUS MEDIA31972 NORTHGATE 31972 PANASONIC 31244, 31807, 31808, 31809 PHILIPS 31340 SONY 31636, 31972 STACK 9 31972 SYSTEMAX 31972 TAGAR SYSTEMS 31972 TOSHIBA 30828, 31008, 31972 TOUCH 31972 VIEWSONIC 31972 VOODOO 31972 ZT GROUP 31972 VCR ABS ACCENT ADMIRAL ADVENTURA ADYSON AIKO AIWA 31972 30072 30048 30000 30072 30278 30000, 30032, 30037, 30307, 30348, 30352 AKAI 30041, 30106, 30240, 30315, 30348, 30352, 30642 AKIBA 30072 AKURA 30072 ALBA 30000, 30072, 30081, 30278, 30315, 30348, 30352 ALIENWARE 31972 ALLSTAR 30081 AMERICA ACTION 30278 AMSTRAD 30000, 30072, 30278 ANAM 30037, 30162, 30226, 30240 ANAM NATIONAL 30162, 30226 ANITECH 30072 ANSONIC 30000 ARISTONA 30081 ASA ASHA ASUKA AUDIOSONIC AUDIOVOX AVP AWA BAIRD 30037, 30081 30240 30037, 30038 30278 30037, 30278 30000, 30352 30043 30000, 30041, 30104, 30106 BASIC LINE 30072, 30104, 30278 BEAUMARK 30240 BEKO 30104 BELL & HOWELL 30104 BESTAR 30278 BLACK DIAMOND 30642 BLACK PANTHER 30278 BLAUPUNKT 30034, 30081, 30162, 30226 BLUE SKY 30037, 30072, 30278, 30348, 30352, 30480, 30642 BONDSTEC 30072 BRANDT 30041, 30206, 30320, 30321 BRANDT ELECTRONIQUE 30041 BRINKMANN 30348 BROKSONIC 30348 BUSH 30000, 30072, 30081, 30278, 30315, 30348, 30352, 30642 CALIX 30037 CARREFOUR 30045 CARVER 30081 CASIO 30000 CATHAY 30278 CCE 30072, 30278 CGE 30000 CIMLINE 30072 CITIZEN 30037, 30278 CLATRONIC 30000, 30072 COLT 30072 COMBITECH 30352 CONDOR 30278 CRAIG 30037, 30072, 30240 CROWN 30037, 30072, 30278, 30480 CURTIS MATHES 30041, 30162 CYBERNEX 30240 CYBERPOWER31972 CYRUS 30081 DAEWOO 30045, 30278, 30352, 30637, 30642 DANSAI 30072, 30278 DANTAX 30352 DE GRAAF 30042, 30048, 30081, 30104, 30166 DECCA 30000, 30067, 30081, 30352 DEITRON 30278 DELL 31972 DENKO 30072 DENON 30042 DIAMANT 30037 APPENDIX-xi DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS 30642 DIGITOR 30642 DSE 30642 DUAL 30000, 30041, 30081, 30278, 30348 DUMONT 30000, 30081, 30104 DYNATECH 30000 ELBE 30038, 30278 ELCATECH 30072 ELECTROHOME 30037 ELECTROPHONIC 30037 ELIN 30240 ELSAY 30072 ELTA 30072, 30278 EMEREX 30032 EMERSON 30000, 30037, 30043, 30045, 30072, 30278, 30637 ESC 30240, 30278 FERGUSON 30000, 30041, 30278, 30320, 30321 FIDELITY 30000, 30072, 30240, 30352 FINLANDIA 30000, 30037, 30042, 30043, 30048, 30081, 30104, 30106, 30166, 30226 FINLUX 30000, 30042, 30081, 30104 FIRSTLINE 30037, 30043, 30045, 30072, 30278, 30348, 30480 FISHER 30104 FLINT 30348 FRONTECH 30072 FUJI 30033 FUJITSU 30000, 30045 FUNAI 30000 GALAXIS 30278 GARRARD 30000 GATEWAY 31972 GE 30048, 30240, 30320 GEC 30081 GENERAL 30045 GENERAL TECHNIC 30348 GENEXXA 30104 GOLDHAND 30072 GOLDSTAR 30037, 30038, 30480 GOODMANS 30000, 30037, 30072, 30081, 30278, 30348, 30352, 30637, 30642 GPX 30037 GRADIENTE 30000 GRAETZ 30041, 30104, 30240 GRANADA 30000, 30037, 30042, 30048, 30081, 30104, 30226, 30240 GRANDIN 30000, 30037, 30072, 30278 APPENDIX-xii GRUNDIG 30034, 30072, 30081, 30226, 30320, 30347, 30348, 30352 HANIMEX 30352 HANSEATIC 30037, 30038, 30081 HARLEY DAVIDSON 30000 HARMAN/KARDON 30038, 30081 HARWOOD 30072 HCM 30072 HEWLETT PACKARD 31972 HINARI 30041, 30072, 30240, 30278, 30352 HISAWA 30352 HISCHITO 30045 HITACHI 30000, 30037, 30041, 30042, 30081, 30166, 30240 HOEHER 30278, 30642 HORNYPHON 30081 HOWARD COMPUTERS 31972 HP 31972 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 30042 HUSH 31972 HYPSON 30000, 30037, 30072, 30278, 30480 IBUYPOWER 31972 IMPERIAL 30000 INGERSOLL 30240 INNO HIT 30072 INTERBUY 30072 INTERFUNK 30081, 30104 INTERNAL 30278, 30637 INTERNATIONAL 30037, 30278, 30642 INTERVISION 30000, 30278 IRRADIO 30072, 30081 ITT 30041, 30104, 30106, 30240 ITV 30037, 30278 JBL 30278 JENSEN 30041 JMB 30348, 30352 JOYCE 30000 JVC 30041, 30067, 30206, 31008, 31279 KAISUI 30072 KAMBROOK 30037 KARCHER 30081, 30278, 30642 KEC 30037, 30278 KENDO 30072, 30106, 30278, 30315, 30348, 30642 KENWOOD 30038, 30041, 30067 KLH 30072 KNEISSEL 30037, 30278, 30348, 30352 KODAK 30037 KORPEL 30072 KYOTO 30072 LENCO 30278 LEYCO 30072 LG LIFETEC LINKSYS LLOYD'S LOEWE 30037, 30480 30348 31972 30000 30037, 30081, 30162, 31562 LOGIK 30072, 30106, 30240 LUX MAY 30072 LUXOR 30043, 30048, 30104, 30106, 30315 LXI 30037 M ELECTRONIC 30000, 30038 MAGNASONIC30278 MAGNAVOX 30000, 30081, 30642 MAGNIN 30240 MAGNUM 30642 MANESTH 30045, 30072, 30081 MARANTZ 30038, 30081 MARK 30000, 30278 MARTA 30037 MASTEC 30642 MASTER'S 30278 MATSUI 30240, 30348, 30352 MATSUSHITA 30162, 30226 MEDIA CENTER PC 31972 MEDION 30348, 30352, 30642 MELECTRONIC 30000, 30037, 30038 MEMOREX 30000, 30037, 30048, 30104, 30162, 30240, 30307, 30348 MEMPHIS 30072 METRONIC 30081 METZ 30037, 30081, 30162, 30226, 30347, 30836, 31562 MGA 30043, 30240 MGN TECHNOLOGY 30240 MICORMAY 30348 MICROSOFT 31972 MIND 31972 MINOLTA 30042 MITSUBISHI 30043, 30048, 30067, 30081, 30480, 30642 MOTOROLA 30048 MTC 30000, 30240 MULTITEC 30037 MULTITECH 30000, 30072 MURPHY 30000 MYRYAD 30081 NAD 30104 NAIKO 30348, 30642 NATIONAL 30226 NEBULA ELECTRONICS 30033 NEC 30037, 30038, 30041, 30067, 30104, 30278 NECKERMANN 30081 NESCO 30072 NIKKAI 30072, 30278 NIKKO 30037 NIKON 30034 NIVEUS MEDIA 31972 NOBLEX 30240 NOKIA 30041, 30042, 30048, 30081, 30104, 30106, 30240, 30278, 30315 NORDMENDE 30041, 30067, 30320, 30321 NORTHGATE 31972 OCEANIC 30000, 30041, 30048, 30081, 30104, 30106 OKANO 30072, 30278, 30315, 30348 OLYMPUS 30226 ONIMAX 30642 OPTIMUS 30037, 30048, 30104, 30162 ORBIT 30072 ORION 30348, 30352 OSAKI 30000, 30037, 30072 OSUME 30072 OTTO VERSAND 30081 PACE 30352 PACIFIC 30000, 30348, 30642 PACKARD BELL 31972 PALLADIUM 30037, 30041, 30072, 30348 PALSONIC 30000, 30072, 30642 PANASONIC 30162, 30226, 30836, 31244, 31562, 31807, 31808, 31809 PATHE CINEMA 30043 PATHE MARCONI 30041 PENNEY 30037, 30038, 30042, 30240 PENTAX 30042 PERDIO 30000 PHILCO 30038, 30072 PHILIPS 30081 PHOENIX 30278 PHONOLA 30081 PILOT 30037 PIONEER 30042, 30067, 30081, 30162 POLK AUDIO 30081 PORTLAND 30278, 30637 PRINZ 30000 PROFITRONIC 30081, 30240 PROLINE 30000, 30278, 30320, 30642 PROSONIC 30278 PROTEC 30072 PROTECH 30081 PROVISION 30278 PYE 30081 QUASAR 30162, 30278 QUELLE 30081 RADIALVA 30037, 30048 RADIOLA 30081 RADIONETTE 30037 RADIOSHACK 30000, 30037 RADIX 30037 RANDEX 30037 RANK ARENA 30041 RCA 30042, 30048, 30106, 30240, 30320 REALISTIC 30000, 30037, 30048, 30104 REOC 30348 REX 30041 RFT 30072 RICAVISION 31972 RICOH 30034 ROADSTAR 30037, 30072, 30081, 30240, 30278 ROYAL 30072 SABA 30041, 30206, 30278, 30320, 30321 SAISHO 30348 SALORA 30043, 30104, 30106 SAMSUNG 30045, 30240 SANKY 30048 SANSUI 30000, 30041, 30067, 30072, 30106 SANYO 30048, 30067, 30104, 30240 SAVILLE 30240, 30278, 30352 SBR 30081 SCHAUB LORENZ 30000, 30041, 30104, 30106, 30315, 30348 SCHNEIDER 30000, 30037, 30042, 30072, 30081, 30240, 30278, 30348, 30352, 30642 SCOTT 30043, 30045 SEARS 30000, 30037, 30042, 30104 SEAWAY 30278 SEG 30072, 30081, 30240, 30278, 30637, 30642 SEI 30081 SELECO 30037, 30041 SEMP 30045 SENTRA 30072 SHARP 30037, 30048 SHINTOM 30072, 30104 SHIVAKI 30037 SHOGUN 30240 SIEMENS 30037, 30081, 30104, 30320, 30347 SIERA 30081 SILVA 30037 SILVER 30278 SINGER 30045, 30072 SINUDYNE 30081, 30352 SMARAGD 30348 SONNECLAIR 30072 SONTEC 30037 SONWA 30642 SONY 30000, 30032, 30033, 30034, 30106, 31032, 31636, 31972 SOUNDWAVE 30037, 30348 SSANGYONG 30072 STACK 9 STERN STS SUNKAI SUNSTAR SUNTRONIC SUNWOOD SUPRA SYLVANIA 31972 30278 30042 30278, 30348 30000 30000 30072 30037 30000, 30043, 30081 SYMPHONIC 30000 SYSTEMAX 31972 T+A 30162 TAGAR SYSTEMS 31972 TANDBERG 30278 TANDY 30000, 30104 TASHIKO 30000, 30037, 30048, 30081, 30240 TATUNG 30000, 30041, 30043, 30048, 30081, 30348, 30352 TCHIBO 30348 TCM 30348 TEAC 30000, 30037, 30041, 30278, 30307, 30637, 30642 TEC 30072 TECH LINE 30072 TECHNICS 30081, 30162, 30226 TEDELEX 30642 TEKNIKA 30000, 30037 TELEAVIA 30041 TELEFUNKEN 30041, 30206, 30278, 30320, 30321, 30642 TELERENT 30226 TELETECH 30000, 30072, 30278 TENOSAL 30072 TENSAI 30000, 30072, 30278 TEVION 30348, 30642 TEXET 30278 THOMAS 30000 THOMSON 30041, 30067, 30278, 30320, 30321 THORN 30037, 30041, 30104 TMK 30240 TOKAI 30037, 30072 TOPLINE 30348 TOSHIBA 30041, 30042, 30043, 30045, 30081, 30352, 30828, 31008, 31972 TOTEVISION 30037, 30240 TOUCH 31972 TOWADA 30072 TRADEX 30081 UHER 30240 ULTRAVOX 30278 UNITECH 30240 UNITED 30348 UNIVERSUM 30000, 30037, 30081, 30104, 30106, 30240, 30348 VECTOR 30045 VECTOR RESEARCH 30038 VICTOR 30041, 30067 VIDEO CONCEPTS 30045 VIDEO TECHNIC 30000 VIDEOMAGIC 30037 VIDEOSONIC 30240 VIEWSONIC 31972 VILLAIN 30000 VOODOO 31972 WARDS 30000, 30033, 30038, 30042, 30045, 30048, 30072, 30081, 30240 WATSON 30081, 30352, 30642 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 30072, 30278, 30637 WORLD 30348 XR-1000 30000, 30072 YAMAHA 30038 YAMISHI 30072, 30278 YOKAN 30072 YOKO 30037, 30240 ZENITH 30000, 30033, 30034, 30637 ZT GROUP 31972 ZX 30348, 30352 DVD PLAYER 3D LAB 40539 A-TREND 40714 ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 40713, 40730, 41450 AEG 40770, 40788, 40790 AIRIS 40672, 41005, 41107 AIWA 40533, 40641 AKAI 40766, 40770, 40788, 40790, 40898, 41115, 41233 AKI 41005 AKURA 40898, 41140, 41170, 41233, 41367 ALBA 40539, 40672, 40695, 40713, 40730, 41140 ALCO 40790 ALIZE 41151 ALL-TEL 41451 ALLEGRO 40869 AMITECH 40770, 40850 AMOI 40852 AMPHION MEDIA WORKS 40872 AMSTRAD 40713 AMW 40872 ANSONIC 40759, 40831 APEX DIGITAL40672, 41004, 41020, 41833 ARIANET 40818 AUDIOSONIC 41265 AUDIOVOX 40790 AUVIO 40843, 41090 AVIOUS 41165 AXION 40730 BASE 41451 BASIC LINE 40713 BAZE 40898, 41165 BBK 40862 BEL CANTO DESIGN 41571 BELLAGIO 41004 BLACK DIAMOND 40713, 40766, 40833 BLUE PARADE40571 BLUE SKY 40651, 40672, 40695, 40713, 40804, 40843 BOGHE 41004 BOMAN 40898 BRAINWAVE 40770, 41115 BRANDT 40503, 40651 BROKSONIC 40695 BUSH 40516, 40672, 40695, 40713, 40730, 40831, 40833, 40879, 41128, 41165 CAMBRIDGE AUDIO 41109 CCE 40730 CELESTIAL 41020 CENTREX 40672, 41004 CENTRUM 40713, 40779, 41005 CGV 40751, 41115 CINEA 40831, 40841 CINETEC 40713 CINEVISION 40833, 40869, 41483 CLASSIC 40730 CLATRONIC 40672, 40788, 40818, 41165 CLAYTON 40713 COBY 40730, 40852, 41107, 41165 CODEX 41233 COMPACKS 41107, 41265 CONIA 40852 CONTINENTAL EDISON 40831 CRAIG 40831 CROWN 40770, 41115 CRYPTO 41228 CYBERCOM 40831 CYBERHOME 40714, 40816, 41023 CYTRON 40651 D-VISION 41115 DAENYX 40872 DAEWOO 40705, 40714, 40770, 40833, 40869, 40872 DAEWOO INTERNATIONAL 40872 DALTON 41036, 41107 DANSAI 40770, 41115 DANTAX 40539, 40713, 40723, 40790 DAYTEK 40872, 41005 DAYTON 40872 DCE 40831 DECCA 40770, 41115 DENON 40490, 40634, 41282, 41634 DENVER 40788, 40898, 41107, 41165, 41450 DESAY 40843, 41090 APPENDIX-xiii DIAMOND 40651, 40768 DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS 40833, 41483 DIGATRON 41009 DIGIHOME 40713 DIGITOR 41005 DIGITREX 40672 DIK 40831 DINAMIC 40788 DISNEY 40675 DIVIDO 40705 DK DIGITAL 40831 DMTECH 41271 DRAGON 40831 DREAMX 41151 DSE 40833, 41483 DUAL 40651, 40665, 40713, 40730, 40779, 40790, 40831 DURABRAND 40713, 40831 EASY HOME 40857 ECC 40730 ECLIPSE 40723, 40751 ELFUNK 40850 ELIN 40770 ELLION 40850 ELTA 40672, 40770, 40788, 40850, 41115, 41151 ELTAX 40766 EMERSON 40591, 40675, 40705 ENTERPRISE 40591 ENZER 41228 EUROLINE 40788, 41115, 41233 FENNER 40651 FERGUSON 40651, 40898 FINLUX 40591, 40672, 40741, 40751, 40770, 41165 FIRSTLINE 40713, 40843, 40869 FISHER 40670 FUNAI 40675, 40695 FUSION 40862 GE 40522 GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 40768 GO VIDEO 40741, 40744, 40833, 40869, 41075, 41483 GOLDSTAR 40591, 40741 GOODMANS 40651, 40713, 40723, 40730, 40790, 40833, 40879, 41004, 41140 GRAETZ 40665 GRAN PRIX 40831, 40898 GRANDIN 40713, 41233 GRUNDIG 40539, 40651, 40670, 40695, 40705, 40713, 40775, 40790, 41004, 41036, 41128 GRUNKEL 40770 H&B 40818, 40841, 40850, 41233 H&B 40713, 40818, 40841, 40850, 41233 HANSEATIC 40741, 40790 APPENDIX-xiv HARMAN/KARDON 40702 HCM 40788 HDT 40705 HENSS 40713 HIMAX 40843 HITACHI 40573, 40664, 40713 HITEKER 40672 HOEHER 40651, 40713, 40831 HOME ELECTRONICS 40730 HOME TECH INDUSTRIES 41107, 41451 HOYO 40665 HYUNDAI 40766, 40850, 41228 INGELEN 40788 INTEGRA 40627 ISP 40695 JATON 40665 JBL 40702 JDB 40730 JDV 41367 JMB 40695 JVC 40503, 40539, 40558, 40623, 40867 KANSAI 41107 KANSAS TECHNOLOGIES 41233 KAWASAKI 40790 KENDO 40713, 40831 KENNEX 40713, 40770, 40898 KENWOOD 40490, 40534 KIIRO 40770 KINGAVON 40818 KISS 40665, 40841, 41523 KLH 40790, 41020 KOSS 40651 KXD 40857 LAWSON 40768 LENCO 40651, 40713, 40770, 41165 LEXIA 40768 LG 40591, 40741, 40790, 40801, 40869 LIFETEC 40651, 40831 LIMIT 40768 LITEON 41058 LODOS 40713 LOEWE 40511, 40539, 40741 LOGIX 40705 LUKER 41367 LUMATRON 40695, 40705, 40741, 40833, 41115 LUNATRON 40741 LUXMAN 40573 LUXOR 40713, 41004 MAGNAVOX 40503, 40539, 40675, 40713, 41140 MAGNEX 40723, 41165 MAJESTIC 41107 MANHATTAN 40705, 40713 MARANTZ 40539 MARK 40713 MARQUANT 40770 MATSUI 40651, 40672, 40695, 40713, 41004 MAXIM 40713, 40872 MBO 40730 MDS 40713 MECOTEK 40770 MEDION 40630, 40651, 40831, 40879, 41107, 41345 MEI 40790 MEMOREX 40695, 40831 METZ 40525, 40571, 40713 MICO 40723, 40751, 41223 MICROBOSS 40718 MICROMEDIA 40503, 40539 MICROMEGA 40539 MICROSOFT 40522 MICROSTAR 40831 MINAX 40713 MINERVA 40705 MINOKA 40770 MINOWA 41165 MIRROR 40879 MITSUBISHI 40713, 41521 MIZUDA 40770, 40818 MONYKA 40665 MPX 40843 MTLOGIC 41265 MUSTEK 40730 MX ONDA 40651, 40751, 41223 NAD 40741 NAIKO 40770, 41004, 41367 NEC 40785, 40869 NEOVIA 41271 NEUFUNK 40665 NEVIR 40770, 40831, 41197 NORCENT 40872, 41107, 41265 NORDMENDE 40831 NU-TEC 41228 OLIDATA 40672 ONKYO 40503, 40627, 40792 OPTIM 40843 OPTIMUS 40525 ORAVA 40818 ORBIT 40872 ORION 40695, 41006, 41128, 41233 ORITRON 40651 ORMOND 40713 P&B 40818, 41451 PACIFIC 40695, 40713, 40759, 40768, 40790, 40804, 40831 PACKARD BELL 40831 PALLADIUM 40695, 40779 PALSONIC 40672, 40852 PANASONIC 40490, 41282 PARAMOUNT PICTURES 40779 PEEKTON 40898 PHILCO 40788 PHILIPS 40503, 40539, 40675 PHILO 41345 PHONOTREND41165 PIONEER 40525, 40571, 41571 PLAYGO 41265 PLU2 40850, 41090 POLAROID 41020 POLK AUDIO 40539 PORTLAND 40770 POWERPOINT 40872 PRIMA 40766 PRIMA ELECTRONIC 40766 PRINZ 40831 PRISM 40705, 41006 PRO2 41107, 41345 PROLINE 40651, 40672, 40833, 41004 PROSCAN 40522 PROSON 40713 QWESTAR 40651 RADIONETTE 40741, 40869 RAITE 40665 RCA 40522, 40571, 40790 REC 40490, 40766 RED STAR 40759, 40763, 40770, 40788, 40898, 41107, 41345 REDSTAR 40763, 40898 REOC 40768 REVOY 40841 RIO 40869 ROADSTAR 40713, 40730, 40818, 40833, 40879, 40898, 41006 RONIN 40872 ROTEL 40558, 40623 ROWA 40516, 40872, 41004 SABA 40651 SAIVOD 40759, 40831, 41367 SALORA 40741 SAMSUNG 40490, 40573, 40744, 41075 SANSUI 40695, 40751, 40768 SANTOSH 41115 SANYO 40670, 40695, 40713, 40873 SCAN 40705, 40850 SCANMAGIC 40730 SCHAUB LORENZ 40770, 40788, 41115, 41151 SCHNEIDER 40539, 40651, 40705, 40713, 40779, 40788, 40790, 40804, 40831 SCIENTIFIC LABS 40768 SCOTT 40651, 40672, 40718, 41005, 41036, 41233 SEG 40665, 40713, 40763, 40768, 40872 SHANGHAI 40672 SHARP 40630, 40675, 40713, 41256 SHERWOOD 40741, 40770 SHINSONIC 40533 SILVA 40788, 40898 SILVA SCHNEIDER 40831, 40898 SINGER 40751 SKANTIC 40539, 40713 SKYMASTER 40730, 40768 SKYWORTH 40766, 40898 SLIDING 41115 SM ELECTRONIC 40730, 40768 SMART 40705, 40713, 40718 SONIC BLUE 40869 SONY 40533, 40573, 40772, 40864, 41033, 41633 SOUND COLOR 41233 SOUNDMASTER 40768 STANDARD 40651, 40768, 40788, 40831, 40898 STARLOGIC 41005 STARMEDIA 40818, 41005 STEVISON 41367 STRONG 40713 SUNKAI 40770, 40850 SUNSTECH 40831 SUNWOOD 40788, 40898 SUPERVISION 40768 SVA 40672 SYLVANIA 40675 SYMPHONIC 40675 SYNN 40768 TANDBERG 40713 TATUNG 40770 TEAC 40516, 40571, 40695, 40741, 40759, 40768, 40790, 40809, 40833, 41006, 41197, 41483 TEC 40898 TECHNICS 40490 TECHNIKA 40770, 40831, 41115, 41165 TECHNISSON 41115 TECHNOSONIC 40730, 41115 TECHWOOD 40713 TEDELEX 41228 TELETECH 40713, 40768 TENSAI 40651, 40770 TEVION 40651, 40833, 40898, 41036, 41170, 41382 THETA DIGITAL 40571 THOMSON 40522 TOKAI 40665, 40788, 40790, 40898 TOM-TEC 41450 TOSHIBA 40503, 40695 TRANS-CONTINENTS 40831, 40872, 41165, 41327 TREDEX 40804, 40843 TRUVISION 40857 UMAX 41151 UNITED 40672, 40695, 40788, 41115, 41165, 41228 UNIVERSUM 40591, 40713, 40741, 40779, 40790, 40869 UPTEK 40763 UPXUS 41345 URBAN CONCEPTS 40503 VENTURER 40790 VESTEL 40713 VIETA 40705, 41265 VIEWMASTER40862 VOXSON 40730, 40831 VTREK 41228 WAITEC 41151 WELKIN 40831 WELLINGTON 40713 WELTSTAR 40713 WHARFEDALE 40751, 40790 WILSON 40831, 41233 WINDSOR 40713 WINDY SAM 40573 WOXTER 41005, 41151 XBOX 40522 XENIUS 40790 XLOGIC 40768 XMS 40770 XORO 41183 YAKUMO 41004 YAMADA 40872, 41004, 41151 YAMAHA 40490, 40539, 41282, 41543 YAMAKAWA 40665, 40872 YUKAI 40730 ZENITH 40503, 40591, 40741, 40869 ZENNOX 41265 ZOECE 41265 LD PLAYER AIWA 40203 CARVER 40064, 40194 DENON 40059 FUNAI 40203 HARMAN/KARDON 40194 HITACHI 40395 KENWOOD 40258 MAGNAVOX 40194, 40217 MARANTZ 40064, 40194 MITSUBISHI 40059 NAD 40059 NAGSMI 40059 OPTIMUS 40059 PANASONIC 40204 PHILIPS 40064, 40194 PIONEER 40059 POLK AUDIO 40194 QUASAR 40204 REALISTIC 40203 SALORA 40064 SHARP 40001 SONY 40193, 40201 TECHNICS 40204 TELEFUNKEN 40059 THETA DIGITAL 40194 VICTOR 40245 WARDS 40059 YAMAHA 40217 DVD RECORDER APEX DIGITAL51056 BOGHE 51221 DENON 50490 DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS 51730 DIGITREX 51056 DSE 51730 ELTAX 51321 FUNAI 50675 GATEWAY 51158 GO VIDEO 50741, 51158, 51730 H&B 51235, 51421 HITACHI 51664 JVC 51164, 51275 KREISEN 51421 LG 50741 LITEON 51158, 51416, 51440, 51456 LOEWE 50741 MAGNAVOX 50646 MEDION 51347 MICO 51221 MITSUBISHI 51403 MUSTEK 51730 NEC 51404 PANASONIC 50490, 51010, 51011 PHILIPS 50646, 51158, 51818 PIONEER 50631, 51475, 51476 RCA 50522 RELISYS 51347 SAMSUNG 50490 SENSORY SCIENCE51158 SHARP 50630, 50675, 51419, 51550, 51556 SINUDYNE 51221 SONY 51033, 51069, 51070, 51433 SYLVANIA 50675 TANGENT 51321 TEVION 51227 THOMSON 50551 TOSHIBA 51510 VICTOR 51275 XORO 51221 YAMADA 51056, 51158, 51416 YAMAHA 51544 ZENITH 50741 CD PLAYER ADC ADCOM ADVANTAGE AIWA AKAI 60018 60234 60032 60157 60156, 60362, 60643 ALTO 60625 ANAM 60362 ARCAM 60157 ARISTON 60625 AUDIO DYNAMICS 60018 AUDIO RESEARCH 60157 AUDIOLAB 60157 AUDIOMECA 60157 AUDIOTON 60157 BUSH 60643 CAIRN 60157 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 60029, 60303 CAMBRIDGE 60157, 60625 CAMBRIDGE AUDIO 60625 CARVER 60157, 60179, 60299 CCE 60643 COPLAND 60393 CYRUS 60157 DENON 60003, 60034, 60626 DKK 60000 DMX ELECTRONICS 60157 DUAL 60003 ECLIPSE 60625 EROICA 60481 FIDELITY 60625 FISHER 60179 GARRARD 60393, 60643 GEMINI 60625 GENEXXA 60032, 60426 GOLDMUND 60157 GOLDSTAR 60643 GOODMANS 60362, 60625 GRUNDIG 60157 GTX 60362 HARMAN/KARDON 60157, 60173, 60426 HCM 60625 HIRO 60625 HITACHI 60032 INTEGRA 60101 KENWOOD 60028, 60157, 60190, 60626 KRELL 60157 KYOCERA 60018 LINN 60157 LG 71208 LOEWE 60157 LUXMAN 60093 MAGNAVOX 60157 MARANTZ 60029, 60157, 60626 MATSUI 60157, 60643 MCS 60029 MEMOREX 60032 MERIDIAN 60157 MICROMEGA 60157 MIRO 60000 MISSION 60157 MITSUBISHI 60156 MTC 60625 MUSICAL FIDELITY 60393 MYRYAD 60157 NAD 60000, 60299, 60721 NAGAOKA 60018 NAIM 60157 NAKAMICHI 60147 NEC 60234 NIKKO 60362, 60625 NSM 60157 ONKYO 60101, 61327 OPTIMUS 60000, 60032, 60179, 60426 ORION 60393 PANASONIC 60029, 60303 PHILIPS 60157, 60626 PINK TRIANGLE 60625 PIONEER 60032, 60101 POLK AUDIO 60157 PROTON 60157 QED 60157 APPENDIX-xv G CD RECORDER DENON HHB JVC 70626, 70766 70192 71294 KENWOOD LG MARANTZ NAD PHILIPS PIONEER RCA SONY TDK TEAC VICTOR YAMAHA 70626 71208 70626 71208 70626 70192, 71087 70420 70000 71208 70420 70072, 71294 70888, 71292 MD RECORDER DENON KENWOOD OPTIMUS PIONEER SHARP SONY TECHNICS YAMAHA 70873 70681 71063 71063 70861, 71684 70490 71078 70490, 70888, 71909 TAPE DECK AIWA 70029, 70197 AKAI 70189, 70283 ARCAM 70076 CARVER 70029 DENON 70076 EROICA 70189 GARRARD 70308, 70309 GRUNDIG 70029 HARMAN/KARDON 70029 INKEL 70070 JVC 70244, 70273 KENWOOD 70070, 70205 MAGNAVOX 70029 MARANTZ 70029 MITSUBISHI 70189, 70283 MYRYAD 70029 ONKYO 70135, 70282 OPTIMUS 70027, 70220 ORION 70308, 70309 PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER POLK AUDIO RADIOLA RCA REVOX SANSUI SHARP SONY TEAC TECHNICS THORENS VICTOR WARDS YAMAHA 70229 70029, 70229 70027, 70220 70029 70029 70027, 70220 70029 70029 70205, 70231 70170, 70243 70283, 70289, 70308, 70309 70229 70029 70244, 70273 70027, 70029 70097, 70205, 70524 TUNER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 81467 AIWA 80158, 80189 AKAI 80115, 80609 ANAM 80281, 80609 ARCAM 80189 CAIRN 80189 CAMBRIDGE 80189 CAMBRIDGE AUDIO 81455, 81647 CARVER 80189 DENON 80004, 80273 DUAL 80004 GARRARD 80281 GOLDMUND 80189 GOLDSTAR 80281 GOODMANS 80609 GRADIENTE 80281 GRUNDIG 80189, 80281 HARMAN/KARDON 80110, 80189 INKEL 80027, 80066 JBL 80110 JVC 80074 KENWOOD 80027, 80645 LG 80281 LINN 80189 © 2006 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA LOEWE 80189 MAGNAVOX 80189 MARANTZ 80189 MEMOREX 80014 MICROMEGA 80189 MUSICAL FIDELITY 80445 MYRYAD 80189 NAD 80320, 80609 NIKKO 80609 ONKYO 80103, 80119 PANASONIC 80309, 80518 PHILIPS 80189 PIONEER 80014 POLK AUDIO 80189 RADIOLA 80189 RESTEK 80189 REVOX 80140, 80189 SANSUI 80189, 80609 SHERWOOD 80066 SIEMENS 80609 SONIC 80281 SONY 80158 SOUNDWAVE 80609 TEAC 80110, 80609 TECHNICS 80309, 80518, 81135 TECHWOOD 80281, 80609 THORENS 80189 UNIVERSUM 80189, 80281, 80609 VICTOR 80074 WARDS 80014, 80158, 80189 YAMAHA 80293, 81908 (TUNER ID1) 81916 (TUNER ID2) 81917 ZENITH 80281 HTR-N5060 QUAD 60157 QUASAR 60029 RADIOLA 60157 RADIOTONE 60625 RCA 60032, 60179 REALISTIC 60179 RESTEK 60157 REVOX 60157 ROTEL 60157, 60897 SAE 60157 SAMSUNG 60524 SANSUI 60157, 60625 SANYO 60179 SEG 60625 SHARP 60034 SHERWOOD 60426 SIEMENS 60157, 60362 SIMAUDIO 60157 SONIC FRONTIERS 60157 SONY 60000 STS 60018 SUPERTECH 60625 SYNERGY 60625 TAG MCLAREN 60157 TANDY 60032 TEAC 60362, 60393, 60625, 60643 TECHNICS 60029, 60207, 60303 TECHWOOD 60362 THORENS 60157 THULE AUDIO60157 TOSHIBA 60299, 60481 TRAXDATA 60626 UNIVERSUM 60157, 60362, 60524 WARDS 60000, 60032, 60157, 60179 YAMAHA 60036, 61907 YBA 60625 HTR-N5060 AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES YAMAHA (iPod) 81981 YAMAHA (NET/USB) 81982 All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WG73970 OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ